Konica Minolta bizhub C650 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Konica Minolta Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. bizhub C650 Series
  6. Service manual

Konica Minolta bizhub C650 Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for bizhub C650:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Operating Manual , System Administrator Manual
SERVICE MANUAL
This service manual is designed for machine with
This service manual is designed for machine with
firmware card ver. J8 and onward.
firmware card ver. J8 and onward.
FIELD SERVICE
2008.06
2008.06
Ver. 8.0
Ver. 8.0

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the bizhub C650 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Konica Minolta bizhub C650

Summary of Contents for Konica Minolta bizhub C650

  • Page 1 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE This service manual is designed for machine with This service manual is designed for machine with firmware card ver. J8 and onward. firmware card ver. J8 and onward. 2008.06 2008.06 Ver. 8.0 Ver. 8.0...
  • Page 2 WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ............S-18 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ............S-21 Composition of the service manual ................. C-1 Notation of the service manual ..................C-2 bizhub C650/C550/C451 Main body Outline ..........................1 Maintenance ......................... 15 Adjustment/Setting...................... 279 Troubleshooting......................
  • Page 3 ZU-603 Outline ..........................1 Maintenance ........................7 Adjustment/Setting ....................... 29 Troubleshooting ......................45 FS-517/518/608 Outline ..........................1 Maintenance ........................5 Adjustment/Setting ....................... 53 Troubleshooting ......................105 PI-503 Outline ..........................1 Maintenance ........................3 Adjustment/Setting ....................... 17 Troubleshooting ......................27 PK-512/513 Outline ..........................
  • Page 4 JS-504 Outline ..........................1 Maintenance ........................3 Adjustment/Setting......................15 Troubleshooting......................19...
  • Page 5 Blank Page...

  • Page 6: Safety And Important Warning Items

    IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.

  • Page 7: Safety Warnings

    [1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors.
  • Page 8 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [2] POWER PLUG SELECTION In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.

  • Page 9: Connection To Power Supply

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engi- neer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure.
  • Page 10 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Power Plug and Cord WARNING • When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product. When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture properly.
  • Page 11 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Wiring WARNING • Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists. • When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
  • Page 12 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Ventilation CAUTION • The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a.
  • Page 13 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Work Performed with the Product Powered On WARNING • Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
  • Page 14 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING • Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. • Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected.

  • Page 15: Handling Of Consumables

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING • Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec- tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte- nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
  • Page 16 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Handling of Service Materials CAUTION • Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists. •...
  • Page 17 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [4] Used Batteries Precautions ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Germany VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.

  • Page 18: Internal Laser Radiation

    Internal Laser Radiation semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW bizhub C650 15.2 µW Maximum average radiation power (*) bizhub C550/C451 12.9 µW Wavelength...
  • Page 19 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS U.S.A., Canada (CDRH Regulation) • This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan- dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
  • Page 20 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Finland, Sweden LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! • Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat- taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser- säteilylle. puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho 30 mW aallonpituus 775-800 nm VARNING!

  • Page 21: Laser Safety Label

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Laser Safety Label • A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below. * Only for the U.S.A. A00JP0E507DA Laser Caution Label • A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below. A00JP0C503DA S-16...

  • Page 22: Precautions For Handling The Laser Equipment

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT • When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications. • When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.

  • Page 23: Warning Indications On The Machine

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock. WARNING Do not burn used toner cartridges.

  • Page 24: High Voltage

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock. High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
  • Page 25 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock. High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
  • Page 26 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
  • Page 27 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT Blank Page S-22...

  • Page 28: Composition Of The Service Manual

    Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to explain the main machine and its corresponding options. Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of each part.

  • Page 29: Notation Of The Service Manual

    Notation of the service manual A. Product name In this manual, each of the products is described as follows: (1) bizhub C650/C550/C451: Main body (2) Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98 Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT...
  • Page 30 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.06 Ver. 8.0...

  • Page 31: Revision History

    Description addition of function enhanced version 2008/01 3 firmware (Card Ver. 88)/Error corrections Description addition of function enhanced version 2007/08 2 firmware/Error corrections Description addition of bizhub C650/ 2007/05 Error corrections Description addition of bizhub C451/ 2007/04 Error corrections 2007/02 —...

  • Page 32: Table Of Contents

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 CONTENTS bizhub C650/C550/C451 Main body Outline System configuration....................1 C650 ........................1 C550 ........................3 C451 ........................5 Product specifications ..................... 7 Maintenance Periodical check ....................15 Maintenance items....................15 3.1.1 Main body ....................15 3.1.2...
  • Page 33 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.5.3 Cleaning of the timing roller ................ 29 3.5.4 Cleaning of the paper dust remover............30 3.5.5 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port ...... 31 3.5.6 Cleaning of the duplex transport rollers ............31 3.5.7 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller........
  • Page 34 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5.3.2 Writing into the compact flash..............71 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006 ....74 5.4.1 Correspond model ..................74 5.4.2 Function outline................... 74 5.4.3 System environment ................... 74 5.4.4 Installation of software ................75 5.4.5 Update of software ..................
  • Page 35 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.12 IR left cover, IR upper front cover ............. 113 6.3.13 IR front cover ................... 114 6.3.14 Original glass .................... 114 6.3.15 Interface cover, rear right cover /1, rear right cover /2, rear right cover /3, rear right cover /4..................
  • Page 36 6.3.60 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) ............189 6.3.61 JPEG board (JPEGB) *bizhub C650 only ..........190 6.3.62 SIF board (SIFB)/EIF board (EIFB) *bizhub C650 only ......191 6.3.63 ADU transport motor/1 (M31)..............193 6.3.64 ADU transport motor/2 (M32)..............194 6.3.65...
  • Page 37 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.86 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)............220 6.3.87 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7)............221 6.3.88 Take-up motor (M22)................. 222 6.3.89 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)..............223 6.3.90 Cleaner motor (M38)................. 225 6.3.91 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21)........230 6.3.92 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14).
  • Page 38 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.4.18 Original glass .................... 269 6.4.19 Scanner rails ..................... 269 6.4.20 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) ................. 270 6.4.21 Lens ......................270 6.4.22 CCD sensor ....................271 Mount the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205) ......... 272 Lubrication procedure ..................
  • Page 39 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8.6.6 Copier Settings ..................398 8.6.7 Printer Settings ..................399 8.6.8 Fax Settings ....................400 8.6.9 System Connection................... 414 8.6.10 Security Settings..................415 8.6.11 License Settings ..................430 Banner Printing (bizhub C451 only) ..............430 My Panel Settings.....................
  • Page 40 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.6.8 Thick Paper Density Adjustment ............... 466 10.6.9 Paper separation adjustment ..............467 10.6.10 TCR Toner Supply..................467 10.6.11 Monochrome Density Adjustment ............. 467 10.6.12 Dev. Bias Choice ..................468 10.7 CS Remote Care ....................469 10.7.1 Outlines .....................
  • Page 41 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.9.7 Scan Caribration ..................498 10.9.8 LCC Size Setting ..................498 10.9.9 LCT Paper Size Setting ................498 10.9.10 Line Mag Setting..................499 10.9.11 Data Capture .................... 499 10.9.12 Split Line Detect. Setting ................501 10.9.13 Stamp .......................
  • Page 42 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.12.7 Temp. & Humidity ..................530 10.12.8 CCD Check ....................530 10.12.9 Memory/HDD Adj..................530 10.12.10 Memory/HDD State................... 535 10.12.11 Color Regist ....................535 10.12.12 IU Lot No....................535 10.12.13 Adjustment Data List................. 535 10.13 Test Mode ......................
  • Page 43 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 11.3 Settings in the Enhanced Security ..............547 11.3.1 CE Password .................... 547 11.3.2 Administrator Password ................547 11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level ..............548 11.3.4 CE Authentication ..................548 11.3.5 IU Life Stop Setting ................... 548 11.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup ................
  • Page 44 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Troubleshooting Jam display ......................577 15.1 Misfeed display ....................577 15.1.1 When the FS-517/518/608 is mounted ............. 577 15.1.2 When the FS-519 is mounted ..............579 15.1.3 When the ZU-603 is mounted ..............581 15.1.4 When the JS-504 is mounted..............
  • Page 45 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.2.12 P-18: PC charge cleaning trouble 2............602 16.2.13 P-21: Color regist test pattern failure ............603 16.2.14 P-22: Color regist adjust failure..............603 16.2.15 P-27: Secondary transfer ATVC failure ............. 603 16.2.16 P-31: PC home sensor (K) malfunction ............ 604 16.3 Trouble code .....................
  • Page 46 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.30 C2352: Color toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn....... 647 16.5.31 C2353: IU cooling fan motor’s failure to turn ..........648 16.5.32 C2354: Rear side cooling fan motor’s failure to turn ......... 648 16.5.33 C2451: Release new transfer belt unit ............
  • Page 47 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.67 C3722: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller) ............... 659 16.5.68 C3725: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (NC sensor)..659 16.5.69 C3723: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (pressurizing side) ........................660 16.5.70 C3724: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (soaking side)..
  • Page 48 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.102 C9401: Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection......671 16.5.103 C9402: Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection ....671 16.5.104 CA051: Standard controller configuration failure ........672 16.5.105 CA052: Controller hardware error ............. 672 16.5.106 CA053: Controller start failure..............
  • Page 49 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.139 CD201: File memory mounting error ............676 16.5.140 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy ............. 676 16.5.141 CD203: Memory capacity discrepancy 2 ..........676 16.5.142 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure..........677 16.5.143 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection........677 16.5.144 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting ........
  • Page 50 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 17.5.2 Finisher ..................... 686 Image quality problem ..................687 18.1 How to read element date................. 687 18.1.1 Table number .................... 688 18.1.2 Level history 1 ................... 689 18.1.3 Level history 2 ................... 690 18.2 How to identify problematic part ............... 691 18.2.1 Initial check items..................
  • Page 51 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.24 Printer monocolor: blurred image ............. 719 18.3.25 Printer monocolor: blank copy, black copy..........720 18.3.26 Printer monocolor: uneven image............. 721 18.3.27 Printer 4-color: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan direction, colored lines in sub scan direction, and colored bands in sub scan direction ....................
  • Page 52 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19.10 FS-519 (option)....................761 19.11 PK-510 (option)....................764 19.12 MT-502 (option)....................765 19.13 SD-503 (option) ....................766 19.14 JS-504 (option) ....................767 Connector layout drawing..................768 Timing chart ......................775 21.1 Main body ......................775 21.2 DF-611/610.......................
  • Page 53 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page xxii...

  • Page 54: Outline

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 1. System configuration Outline System configuration C650 1/2 System front view [10] [11] [12] [10] [11] A00HT1C301AB Main body Large capacity unit LU-301 Authentication unit: Biometric type Z folding unit ZU-603 AU-101 Finisher FS-517/518 Authentication unit: IC card type Finisher FS-608...
  • Page 55 1. System configuration Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 2/2 System rear view [10] [11] A00HT1E001DB Main body Scan accelerator kit SA-501 * Standard Stamp unit SP-501 Fax kit FK-502 Fax multi line ML-501 Security kit SC-503 Key counter kit KIT-1 Image controller IC-409...
  • Page 56 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 1. System configuration C550 1/2 System front view [10] [11] [12] [10] [11] A00JT1C301AB Main body Large capacity unit LU-301 Authentication unit: Biometric type Z folding unit ZU-603 AU-101 Finisher FS-517/518 Authentication unit: IC card type Finisher FS-608 AU-201...
  • Page 57 1. System configuration Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 2/2 System rear view [10] [11] A00HT1E001DB Main body Scan accelerator kit SA-501 Stamp unit SP-501 Fax multi line ML-501 Fax kit FK-502 Key counter kit KIT-1 Security kit SC-503 [10] i-Option LK-101*/102*/103 Image controller...
  • Page 58 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 1. System configuration C451 1/2 System front view [12] [13] [14] [11] [10] A00KT1C203AB [17] [17] [15] [16] A00KT1C204AC [1] Main body [10] Output tray (for FS-519) OT-602 [2] Authentication unit: Biometric type AU-101 [11] Punch kit PK-510 [3] Authentication unit: IC card type...
  • Page 59 1. System configuration Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 2/2 System rear view [10] [11] A00HT1E001DB Main body Scan accelerator kit SA-501 Stamp unit SP-501 Fax multi line ML-501 Fax kit FK-502 Key counter kit KIT-1 Security kit SC-503 [10] i-Option LK-101*/102*/103 Image controller...

  • Page 60: Product Specifications

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 2. Product specifications Product specifications A. Type Type Combination scanner and printer console type Copying system Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper Printing process Laser electrostatic printing system PC drum type OPC drum: KM-12 (OPC with high mold releasability) Scanning density 600 dpi Exposure lamp...
  • Page 61 2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 B. Functions Types of original Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17 Max. original weight Max. 2 kg Multiple copies 1 to 9999 Warm-up time When the sub power switch is turned ON at any timing while the main power (at ambient tempera- switch remains ON for a predetermined period of time or more...
  • Page 62 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 2. Product specifications Fixed zoom ratios Full size x1.000 Metric area x0.500, x0.707, x0.816, x0.866 Reduction Inch area x0.500, x0.647, x0.733, x0.785 Metric area x1.154, x1.224, x1.414, x2.000 Enlargement Inch area x1.214, x1.294, x1.545, x2.000 Zoom ratios memory Metric area 3 memories...
  • Page 63 2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 C. Paper Paper source (maximum tray capacity) Type Multiple Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 bypass Plain paper ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ (64 to 90 g/m / 17 (500 sheets) (500 sheets) (1500 sheets)
  • Page 64 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 2. Product specifications *2: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3/4 is used. *3: Monochrome print only. *4: Paper to be reliably fed through only for C451 (127 to 210 g/m (33.75 to 55.75 lb)) Automatic duplex unit : Only the plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m (17 to 24 lb) or...
  • Page 65 2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 E. Machine specifications • C650 Voltage: AC 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V Current: 100 V 15 A + 7A 110 V 15 A + 7A Power requirements 120 V 16 A 127 V 16 A...
  • Page 66 Client Windows NT4.0 (SP6) Mac OS 9.2 or later/Mac OS X 10.2, 10.3, 10.4 Linux H. Scan functions Driver KONICA MINOLTA scanner driver Compatible operating Windows 2000, Windows XP/XP (incl. 64 bit) systems Monochrome: 75 pages/min C650: DF-610 Scan speed...
  • Page 67 2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 68: Maintenance

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance items NOTE • Cleaning/replacement cycle for each maintenance item of main body/options can be evaluated with each life counter value of [Service mode] → [Counter] → [Life]. 3.1.1 Main body A.

  • Page 69: Df-610/Df-611

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 D. Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 2 (per 300,000-print) Lubri- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Check Clean Replace cation tions Paper feed and image con- ⎯ ● ditions Overall ⎯ ● ● Appearance ●...
  • Page 70 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check B. Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 1 (per 200,000-original feed) Lubri- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Check Clean Replace cation tions Paper feed and image ⎯ ● conditions Overall ⎯ ● ● Appearance ●...
  • Page 71 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.1.5 FS-517/518/608 A. Maintenance call (per 100,000-print) Lubri- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Check Clean Replace cation tions Paper feed and image ⎯ ● conditions Overall ⎯ ● ● Appearance ⎯...
  • Page 72 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check D. Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 3 (per 500,000-print) *FS-518 only Lubri- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Check Clean Replace cation tions Paper feed and image ⎯ ● conditions Overall ⎯ ● ●...
  • Page 73 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 C. Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 2 (per 600,000-print) Lubri- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Check Clean Replace cation tions Paper feed and image ⎯ ● conditions Overall ⎯ ● ● Appearance ●...

  • Page 74: Cms Corresponding Parts

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check CMS corresponding parts 3.2.1 CMS corresponding parts • “CMS” stands for “customer maintenance support,” and this is applicable when the user wants to change parts by himself. 3.2.2 CMS corresponding parts list Section Corresponding parts Cycle...

  • Page 75: Maintenance Parts

    • Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter. • Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 x 11, standard mode and low power mode OFF. Color bizhub C650 5 pages per job 7 pages per job * Standard mode bizhub C550...
  • Page 76 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check *2: Replace those three parts at the same time. *3: 110 V to 120 V areas only. *4: 220-240 V areas only. *5: This part number include the ozone filter. *6: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions. B.

  • Page 77: Cleaning Parts

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Actual durable Descrip Ref. No. Classification Parts name Parts No. cycle *1 tions Page 9J08 1605 ## Paddle 800,000 A01G 7203 ## FS-519 Cleaning pad 800,000 A01G 7205 ## Cover film 800,000 A01G 8947 ## *1: Actual durable cycle is the life counter value.
  • Page 78 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check Descrip- No. Classification Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Ref.Page tions ⎯ Punch edge Upon each call (100,000) ⎯ Punch scraps box Upon each call (100,000) PK-512 Punch scraps full ⎯ PK-513 Upon each call (100,000) sensor...

  • Page 79: Concept Of Parts Life

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Concept of parts life 3.4.1 Life value of consumables and parts • The life counter value of each materials and parts is available from [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life]. • Life specification value means an actual life terminated when prints are made under the conditions as defined in the next section, “Conditions for life specifications values.”...

  • Page 80: Conditions For Life Specifications Values

    (see the table given below) are met. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user. Item Description Monochrome : Making 7 copies per job bizhub C650 Color : Making 5 copies per job Monochrome : Making 6 copies per job Job type...

  • Page 81: Maintenance Procedure (Periodical Check Parts)

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 3.5.1 Cleaning of the electrostatic charger wire Y/M/C A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle •...

  • Page 82: Cleaning Of The Timing Roller

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3. Insert the cleaning tool [1] into the print head cleaning opening [2], pull it out, and then repeat this back-and- forth movement two or three times. NOTE • When using the cleaning tool, put the side with “UP”...

  • Page 83: Cleaning Of The Paper Dust Remover

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.5.4 Cleaning of the paper dust remover A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Paper dust remover: Every 100,000 prints (upon each call) B. Procedure 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Pushing the hook [1], remove the paper dust remover [2].

  • Page 84: Cleaning Of The Area Around The Waste Toner Collecting Port

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.5.5 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Area around the waste toner collecting port: Every 100,000 prints (upon each call) B. Procedure 1.

  • Page 85: Replacing The Tray 1 Feed Roller/Tray 1 Pick-Up Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.5.7 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 1 feed roller: Every 300,000 prints • Tray 1 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1.
  • Page 86 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 feed roller cover [2]. A00JF2C010DA 7. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [3]. A00JF2C011DA 8.

  • Page 87: Replacing The Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 9. Remove the C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and bearing [3], and remove the tray 1 pick-up roller [4]. A00JF2C013DA 10. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 11. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy. See P.34 12.

  • Page 88: Replacing The Tray 2 Feed Roller/Tray 2 Pick-Up Roller

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 5. Remove the C-clip [1],and remove the tray 1 separation roller assy [2]. A00JF2C016DA 6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 3.5.9 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller A.
  • Page 89 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. Remove four screws [1], and remove the tray 2 paper feed unit [2]. A00JF2C019DA 8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 separation roller installa- tion plate assy [2]. A00JF2C020DA 9.
  • Page 90 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 10. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [3]. A00JF2C022DA 11. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the tray 2 feed roller [3].

  • Page 91: Replacing The Tray 2 Separation Roller Assy

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.5.10 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 2 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Slide out the tray 2. 2. Open the lower right door. 3.

  • Page 92: Replacing The Tray 3 Feed Roller/Tray 3 Pick-Up Roller

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.5.11 Replacing the tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 3 feed roller: Every 300,000 prints • Tray 3 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1.

  • Page 93: Replacing The Tray 3 Separation Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 3 pick-up roller [2]. A00JF2C027DA 6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 7. Remove the tray 3 separation roller. See P.40 8.
  • Page 94 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from two edge covers [2]. NOTE • When reinstalling the harness, route the harness so that the har- ness tie [3] is positioned as shown in the illustration on the left.

  • Page 95: Replacing The Tray 4 Feed Roller/Tray 4 Pick-Up Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.5.13 Replacing the tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 4 feed roller: Every 300,000 prints • Tray 4 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1.

  • Page 96: Replacing The Tray 4 Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 6. Remove the tray 4 separation roller. See P.43 7. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [4th.]. See P.504 3.5.14 Replacing the tray 4 separation roller A.
  • Page 97 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 4 paper feed unit [2]. A00JF2C036DA 5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 4 separation roller [2]. A00JF2C037DA 6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

  • Page 98: Replacing The Manual Bypass Tray Feed Roller/Manual Bypass Tray Pick-Up

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.5.15 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller/manual bypass tray pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Manual bypass tray feed roller: Every 300,000 prints • Manual bypass tray pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints B.
  • Page 99 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the manual bypass tray feed roller [3]. A00JF2C041DA 7. Remove three C-rings [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the manual bypass tray pick-up roller [3].

  • Page 100: Replacing The Manual Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.5.16 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Manual bypass tray separation roller assy: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Open the manual bypass tray door. 2.

  • Page 101: Replacing The Waste Toner Box

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.5.17 Replacing the waste toner box A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Waste toner box: Every 57,000 prints B. Removal procedure 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Release the securing levers [1] for the waste toner box, and then remove the waste toner box [2].

  • Page 102: Replacing The Imaging Unit

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check C. Reinstall procedure 1. Install the new waste toner box [1], and close the lower front door. A00JF2C509DA 3.5.18 Replacing the imaging unit A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Imaging unit Y/M/C: Every 100,000 prints •...
  • Page 103 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Remove the imaging unit [1]. A00JF2C511DA C. Reinstall procedure 1. Remove the imaging unit from its packaging. 2. Peel off the tape, and then remove the packing material [1]. A00JF2C512DA 3.
  • Page 104 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 4. Remove the packing material [1] and securing material [1]. A00JF2C514DA 5. Peel off the tape [1], and remove the protective sheet [2] for the PC drum. A00JF2C515DB 6. Insert the new imaging unit [1] into the machine, and close the securing lever for the imaging unit.

  • Page 105: Replacing The Ozone Filter

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. Install the waste toner box [1], and close the lower front door. A00JF2C509DA 8. To replace the imaging unit K, replace the color toner filter included the box. See P.53 3.5.19 Replacing the ozone filter A.

  • Page 106: Replacing The Color Toner Filter

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.5.20 Replacing the color toner filter A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Color toner filter: Every 150,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Remove the color toner filter [1], and then install the new color toner filter. A00JF2C539DA 2.
  • Page 107 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 C. Reinstall procedure 1. Remove the new toner cartridge [1] from its packaging, and then shake the cartridge up and down 5 to 10 times. A00JF2C503DB 2. Remove the protective tape [1]. A00JF2C603DB 3.

  • Page 108: Replacing The Transfer Belt Unit

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.5.22 Replacing the transfer belt unit A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Transfer belt unit: Every 450,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Remove the screw [1] and the upper right door stopper.
  • Page 109 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Remove two screws [1] and pull the two transfer belt locks [2] towards the right of the main body to unlock the transfer belt. NOTE • Remove two screws [1] and pull the two transfer belt locks [2] towards the right of the main body to unlock the transfer belt.
  • Page 110 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 7. Install the rail [1] on the main body and secure it with two shoulder screws [2]. NOTE • Make sure that the protrusion (at two places) on the rail is inserted into the dowel holes [3] (at two places) on the main body.
  • Page 111 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 NOTE • When removing/reinstalling the transfer belt unit, be sure not to allow the contact [1] to hit the screw [2] of the transfer belt unit lock. A00JF2C609DA 10. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

  • Page 112: Replacing The Transfer Roller Unit

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.5.23 Replacing the transfer roller unit A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Transfer roller unit: Every 450,000 prints B. Removal procedure 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Unlock the lock levers [1] of the transfer roller unit (at two places).

  • Page 113: Replacing The Fusing Unit

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.5.24 Replacing the fusing unit CAUTION • The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fusing unit. You may get burned when you come into contact with the area. Before replacement operations, make sure that more than 20 minutes have elapsed since the main and sub power switches were turned off.
  • Page 114 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. NOTE • When reinstalling the fusing unit, be sure to press the fusing unit into the machine until the surfaces of the A [1] and B [2] are level with each other.

  • Page 115: Service Tool

    4. Service tool Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Service tool Service material list Name Shape Material No. Remarks ⎯ Isopropyl alcohol A00KF2C506DA Molykote EM-50L grease 4478 7801 ## Used with FS-519 A00KF2C507DA Heat-resistant conductive SANKOL ECG-25 grease A00J PP00 ## grease A00JF2C613DA CE tool list...

  • Page 116: Copy Materials

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Service tool Tool name Shape Quantity Parts No. Remarks Slit glass cleaning jig A01H 1005 ## A00JF2C527DA 9J06 PJP1 ## A3 Color chart 9J06 PJP2 ## 11 x 17 4036fs2577c0 V865400001 Compact flash (blank) 4037F2C601DA *1: Inquire of KMBT about the part number of compact flash in which the firmware data is...

  • Page 117: Waste Toner Box

    4. Service tool Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4.3.3 Waste toner box Parts name Replacing period *1 Waste toner box 57,000 prints *1 *1: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions. See P.26 4.3.4 Maintenance kit There is no setting for the maintenance kit.

  • Page 118: Firmware Upgrade

    Internet ISW. Notes about firmware rewrite 5.2.1 Types of firmware • Two types of firmware are released for bizhub C650/C550/C451. They are a mainte- nance release version and an enhanced version. Maintenance release version : Addresses remaining problems Function enhanced version...
  • Page 119 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 • Take the following steps to perform processing that ensures compatibility. A. Upgrade to the function enhancement 1 from the early mass-production firmware (only for bizhub C550/C451) (1) Conversion Up 1. After rewriting the firmware, turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch.
  • Page 120 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 4. When XPS Enable Format is completed, the result is displayed on the screen. 5. Turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch. C. Upgrade to the function enhancement 2 from the function enhancement 1 (1) Up Version 1.
  • Page 121 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) XPS Disable Format (bizhub C550/C451 only) • After completing Conversion Down, take the following steps if XPS Disable Format needs to be performed. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.
  • Page 122 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade G. Upgrade to the function enhancement 3 from the early mass-production firmware (1) HDD Version Up (LK) 1. After rewriting the firmware, turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch.
  • Page 123 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Downgrade from the function enhancement 4 to the function enhancement 3 NOTE • Before downgrading the firmware, the following steps are required to be taken. (1) Down Ver. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.

  • Page 124: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Windows Command Prompt

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade Preparations for firmware rewriting by Windows Command Prompt 5.3.1 Service environment • OS: Windows 2000/XP • Drive which enables writing/reading of compact flash • Compact flash (service tool) 5.3.2 Writing into the compact flash 1.
  • Page 125 • For ## within the above mkcf command, type two characters that correspond to the machine model on which firmware upgrading is made. Take a look at the following list to find right characters for a correct command. Model and command list bizhub C650 bizhub C550 bizhub C451 A00JF2E568DA...
  • Page 126 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 8. Upon completion of writing, CHECKSUM is executed. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched, “VERIFY OK” appears. 4038F2E565DB 9. Remove the compact flash from PC. NOTE • When removing the compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method.

  • Page 127: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006

    • This software is designed as the tool to write firmware data of MFP/printer released by KMBT into the compact flash card. 5.4.1 Correspond model • Correspond models of the software is as follows. • bizhub C650/C550/C451/C450/C353/C352/C351/C350/C300/C253/C250/C203 Color machine • bizhub C450P/C353P/C352P/C250P • bizhub 350/250/200 B/W machine •...

  • Page 128: Installation Of Software

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 5.4.4 Installation of software • Follow the procedures shown below to install the software. NOTE • Install the software to the PC with the administration authentication. • When any anti-virus program is activated, quite the program before the installa- tion.
  • Page 129 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. After checking the contents of license agreement, select [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next >]. 9J06F2E701DA 4. Select the installed destination folder of Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006, and click [Next>].

  • Page 130: Update Of Software

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 5. Click [Install] to start installation. 6. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 9J06F2E703DA 7. Shortcut file will be created inside Windows Start menu ([Program] → [KONICA MINOLTA] → [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006]). 9J06F2E708DA 5.4.5 Update of software...

  • Page 131: Screen

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5.4.6 Screen A. Main window • The main window will be displayed after activating the software. • Main window consists of 2 patterns: Basic mode, Advanced mode When the advanced mode is selected 9J06F2E704DA About •...
  • Page 132 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade B. Settings dialog • It will be displayed by clicking [Settings] at main window. • Other settings will be enabled by selecting the check box of [Enabled Advanced Fea- tures]. 9J06F2E705DA Enable Advanced •...

  • Page 133: Details Of Each Function

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5.4.7 Details of each function A. Basic functions (1) Write Firmware to a card • To write FW data into the compact flash. The FW data of the models shown below can be written.
  • Page 134 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade B. Advanced functions (1) Create a Firmware Image from a card • Create the image file from the firmware data written into the compact flash. Create the image file by dumping directly the data in the card. This function allows us to save the various type of firmware data in the compact flash as the image file and hold as copy data.

  • Page 135: How To Write Firmware Data

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5.4.8 How to write firmware data A. In the case of C650/C550/C451/C450/C450P/C353/C353P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/ C253/C250/C250P/C203 series 1. Put the firmware data in the optional directory. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) 9J06F2E710DA NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.”...
  • Page 136 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 3. Mount the compact flash on the PC, and check the drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure) 9J06F2E712DA 4. Start Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. NOTE •...
  • Page 137 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Click [Browse]. 9J06F2E707DA 7. Select the file type [C650/C550/C451 Indexed Firmware]. A00HF2E509DA 8. Move to the folder decompressed at step 2, confirm that only "###_cf.tar.gz" (### is for model name) is displayed, and select. NOTE •...
  • Page 138 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 10. Select the drive that the compact flash is inserted, which is confirmed at step 3. NOTE • The drives other than the compact flash that is recognized as “Removable Disk” can be selected for the writing destination.
  • Page 139 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 13. Click [Yes], and data writing starts. NOTE • Writing a card is a resource intensive operation for your computer - do not attempt to multitask (use the computer for anything else) during the writing procedure. 14.

  • Page 140: Firmware Rewriting By Compact Flash

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade Firmware rewriting by compact flash • The firmware is updated using the compact flash. 5.5.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the compact flash card with the machine power turned 1.
  • Page 141 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].) A00JF2C557DA F/W to be updated Appropriate board MFP CONTROLLER MFP board (MFPB) SCANNER Image processing board (IPB) PRINTER Printer control board (PRCB) FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) *1 FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) *2 ADF (DF-M)
  • Page 142 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade NOTE • When turning the main power switch ON for the first time after the firmware is updated, data may sometimes be internally updated. In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power switch OFF until either the serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.

  • Page 143: Action When Data Transfer Fails

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5.5.2 Action when data transfer fails • If “NG” appears on the control panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps. 1.

  • Page 144: Updating The Firmware With The Internet Isw

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade Updating the firmware with the Internet ISW 5.6.1 Outline • [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the firmware with the control panel of the main body, so the main body will automatically receive the firmware from the program server over a network for updating.
  • Page 145 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Touch [ON], and touch [END]. NOTE • Settings such as server setting, etc. will be available by selecting “ON” on this set- ting. • When the following setting is set to “ON”, “ON” cannot be selected on this setting. [Administrator Setting] →...
  • Page 146 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade C. Forwarding access setting • To make the access setting for the program server which stores the firmware data. 1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. 2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting]. A00JF2E584DA 3.

  • Page 147: Firmware Rewriting

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5.6.4 Firmware rewriting NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission before- hand. • DO NOT turn OFF the main/sub power switch while downloading. A. Conducting rewriting on the control panel. 1.
  • Page 148 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade C. Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return to the main screen. (2) Failing to update the firmware due to the network trouble 1.

  • Page 149: Error Code List For The Internet Isw

    [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] →...
  • Page 150 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade Error code Description Countermeasure Control panel • Check the User’s network environment. (LAN cable’s connection) • Check the status of the following set- Error concerning the network ting. 0x00111000 [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → •...
  • Page 151 • If the above process does not solve the • There is no space for F/W data to be 0x10000104 problem, inform the corresponding downloaded. error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. 0x10000106 • Check sum error File access error • The file downloaded has an error.

  • Page 152: Other

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Other Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

  • Page 153: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts) 6.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Upper front door P.105 Lower front door P.106 Upper front cover /1 P.108 Upper front cover /2 P.108 Right front cover P.109 Lower front cover P.110...
  • Page 154 Operation panel control board (OPCB) P.187 Operation panel I/O board (OPIOB) P.188 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) P.188 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) P.189 JPEG board (JPEGB) *bizhub C650 only P.190 SIF board (SIFB)/EIF board (EIFB) *bizhub C650 only P.191...
  • Page 155 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Section Part name Ref. page ADU transport motor/1 (M31) P.193 ADU transport motor/2 (M32) P.194 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) P.195 Bypass paper feed motor (M27) P.195 Scanner motor (M201) P.199 Original glass moving motor (M202) P.202 Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
  • Page 156 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Section Part name Ref. page Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) P.236 Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL2) P.237 Horizontal transport clutch 1 (CL3) P.238 Clutches Horizontal transport clutch 2 (CL4) P.238 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5) P.239 Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6)

  • Page 157: Cleaning Parts List

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.2.2 Cleaning parts list Section Part name Ref. page Processing section Transfer belt unit P.261 Tray 1 feed roller P.261 Tray 1 pick-up roller P.261 Tray 1 Tray 1 separation roller P.262 Tray 1 transport roller P.262 Tray 2 feed roller...

  • Page 158: Disassembly/Assembly Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Disassembly/assembly procedure 6.3.1 Upper front door 1. Open the upper front door. 2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stopper [2]. A00JF2C061DA 3. Remove the C-clip [1]. A00JF2C062DA 4. Slide the upper front door [1] to the left to remove it.

  • Page 159: Lower Front Door

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.2 Lower front door 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stopper [2]. A00JF2C064DA 3. Remove five screws [1], and remove the sensor cover [2]. A00JF2C065DA 4.
  • Page 160 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2]. A00JF2C067DA 6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the waste toner agitating motor lock sensor assy [2]. A00JF2C068DA 7. Remove the screw [1], and remove the waste toner full sensor assy [2].

  • Page 161: Upper Front Cover /1

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Remove the tape that fastens the harness. 9. Remove the screw [1] one for each of hinge at the lower front door, and take out the lower front door [2]. A00JF2C070DA 6.3.3 Upper front cover /1 1.

  • Page 162: Right Front Cover

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.5 Right front cover 1. Remove the upper front door. See P.105 2. Open the upper right door. 3. Remove the front right cover. See P.117 4. Open the lower front door. 5.

  • Page 163: Lower Front Cover

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.6 Lower front cover 1. Slide out the tray 1/2. 2. Remove the front right cover. See P.117 3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the lower front cover [2]. NOTE • Do not remove it in rush as it is con- nected to the harness.

  • Page 164: Upper Left Cover

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.7 Upper left cover 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Remove six screws [1], and remove the upper left cover [2]. A00JF2C078DA 6.3.8 Lower left cover 1. Slide out the tray 1/2/3. 2.

  • Page 165: Rear Left Cover

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.9 Rear left cover 1. Remove the upper left cover. See P.111 2. Remove the upper rear cover /2. See P.116 3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear left cover [2]. A00JF2C081DA 6.3.10 Paper exit rear cover...

  • Page 166: Ir Rear Cover, Ir Right Cover, Ir Upper Rear Cover /1, Ir Upper Rear Cover /2

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.11 IR rear cover, IR right cover, IR upper rear cover /1, IR upper rear cover /2 [10] A00JF2C084DA 1. Remove three screws [1] and the shoulder screw [2], and take out the IR rear cover [3]. 2.

  • Page 167: Original Glass

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.13 IR front cover 1. Remove the IR upper front cover. See P.113 2. Remove the upper front cover /1. See P.108 3. Remove the IR left cover. See P.113 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the IR front cover [2].

  • Page 168: Interface Cover, Rear Right Cover /1, Rear Right Cover /2, Rear Right Cover /3, Rear Right Cover /4

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Remove the original glass [1]. A00JF2C089DA 6.3.15 Interface cover, rear right cover /1, rear right cover /2, rear right cover /3, rear right cover /4 [10] [11] A00JF2C090DA 1. Unhook the three tabs [1] and take out the interface cover [2]. 2.

  • Page 169: Manual Bypass Tray Rear Cover

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.16 Manual bypass tray rear cover 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Manual bypass tray rear cover [2]. A00JF2C580DA 6.3.17 Upper rear cover /1, upper rear cover /2, lower rear cover A00JF2C091DA 1.

  • Page 170: Front Right Cover

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.18 Front right cover 1. Open the manual bypass tray door. 2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the front right cover [2]. A00JF2C092DA 6.3.19 Control panel assy 1. Remove the upper front cover /1. See P.108 2.
  • Page 171 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cover [2]. A00JF2C095DA 6. Loosen two screws [1], and discon- nect the connector [2]. A00JF2C096DA 7. Remove three screws [1], and remove the control panel assy [2]. A00JF2C097DA...

  • Page 172: Exit Tray (Option: Ot-503)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.20 Exit tray (option: OT-503) 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit tray [2]. A00JF2C517DA 2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the connector cover [2]. A00JF2C518DA 3. Disconnect the connector [2] of the fan unit [1].

  • Page 173: Finisher Rail (Bizhub C451 Only)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and two screws [2], and remove the fan unit [3]. A00JF2C520DA 6.3.21 Finisher rail (bizhub C451 only) 1. If the optional finisher FS-519 is mounted, remove it. See P.28 of the FS-519/PK-510/OT- 602 service manual.

  • Page 174: Tray 1/2

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 2. Remove three screws [1] to take off each one of the two finisher rail mounting plates [2]. 3. Remove two finisher rails [3]. A00KF2C502DA 6.3.22 Tray 1/2 NOTE • Tray 1 and 2 has the same mechanism. The procedure is mainly for the tray 1. 1.

  • Page 175: Tray 3/4

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.23 Tray 3/4 NOTE • Tray 3 and 4 has the same mechanism. The procedure is mainly for the tray 3. 1. Slide out the tray. 2. Remove two screws [1] and six screws [2], and remove the tray [3].

  • Page 176: Ph Unit

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Disconnect the flat cable [1], and remove the LCD module [2]. A00JF2C099DA 6.3.25 PH unit CAUTION • Do not replace the printer head unit while the power is ON. Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause blindness.
  • Page 177 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Disconnect the connector [1]. A00JF2C161DA 5. Unplug two flat cables [1] and removed if from the cable guide [2]. Remove the screw [3] to remove the ground terminal [4]. NOTE • Handle the flat cables carefully. Remove them from the cable guide with care while making it parallel to the guide.
  • Page 178 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 7. Remove the screw [1] and take out the plate spring [2]. A00JF2C102DA 8. Hold up the PH unit [1] slightly and pull it toward to remove. A00JF2C103DA 9. Select [Skew adjustment] after selecting [Service Mode] →...

  • Page 179: Duplex Unit

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.26 Duplex unit 1. Remove two screws [1] and two tabs [2] to take out the duplex unit cover [3]. A00JF2C105DA 2. Open the duplex unit door. 3. Remove three screws [1]. A00JF2C106DA 4.

  • Page 180: Manual Bypass Tray Unit

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the duplex unit. A00JF2C108DA 6.3.27 Manual bypass tray unit 1. Remove the rear right cover /4. See P.115 2. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and the edge cover [3].
  • Page 181 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1]. A00KF2C503DA 5. Open the manual bypass tray. 6. Remove the E-ring [1]. 7. Remove the hinge shaft [2] from below and remove the manual bypass tray [3].

  • Page 182: Ccd Unit

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.28 CCD unit A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the original glass. See P.114 2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the image processing board protec- tive shield [2]. A00JF2C156DA 3. Remove the flat cable [1]. 4.
  • Page 183 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch. 4. Carry out the [Cross Direction Adjustment]. If the specifications are not met, loosen the CCD unit mounting screws and move the CCD unit in the sub scan direction as neces- sary.

  • Page 184: Original Glass Moving Unit

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.29 Original glass moving unit A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the IR left cover. See P.113 2. Remove the IR front cover. See P.114 3. Remove the original glass. See P.114 4. Remove the original glass moving motor. See P.202 5.
  • Page 185 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Disconnect the connector [1]. A00JF2C418DA 9. Remove four screws [1], and remove the original glass moving unit [2]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the spacer [3] mounted on each screw. •...

  • Page 186: Glass Step Sheet

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Tighten four screws [1] loosely and adjust the height of the original glass moving unit. See P.564 A00JF3C013DA 4. Tighten four screws [1] fully. A00JF2C421DA 5. Follow the removing procedures in the opposite steps. 6.
  • Page 187 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 B. Reinstall procedure 1. Mount the glass step sheet [1] to the original glass moving unit [2]. NOTE • Set the sheet [3] under the cover of the original glass moving unit [4]. •...

  • Page 188: Scanner Assy

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.31 Scanner assy A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the original glass. See P.114 2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the scanner assy [2]. A00JF2C422DA 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exposure lamp [2] from the scan- ner assy.
  • Page 189 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 2. Tighten the scanner assy [2] with the two screws [1] temporarily. A00JF2C422DA 3. Move the scanner assy [1] and the mirror unit to the end of the right. A00JF2C424DA 4. Slide the mirror unit until it hits the end of the IR right frame.

  • Page 190: Hard Disk

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.32 Hard disk 1. Open the printer control board assy and put it to the hook of the machine frame. See the steps 1 to 3 of slide interface board removing procedure. See P.166 2.

  • Page 191: Ih Coil (Fh1)

    The terminal leakage may cause fire. A00JF2C460DA A: The harness with the longest orange color (blue color for bizhub C650) is installed with the M4 screw. B: The harness with orange color (blue color for bizhub C650) is installed with the M4 screw.
  • Page 192 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Remove six screws [1] and remove the terminals of each harness. A00JF2C120DA 4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the exit tray right cover [2]. A00JF2C570DA 5. Remove three screws [1], and remove the exit tray front cover [2].
  • Page 193 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. A00JF2C225DA 7. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the har- ness guide [2]. A00JF2C226DA 8. Remove the screw [1], and remove the harness guide [2].
  • Page 194 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 9. Remove the harness from two edge covers [1]. A00JF2C121DA 10. Remove the fixture of the IH coil [1] as shown in the left illustration. A00JF2C123DA 11. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].

  • Page 195: Intermediate Transport Roller Assy

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 12. Removing the harness [1], remove the IH coil [2]. A00JF2C124DA 6.3.34 Intermediate transport roller assy 1. Open the manual bypass tray door. 2. Remove the rear right cover /2 and rear right cover /4. See P.115 3.
  • Page 196 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from four wire saddles [2] and the edge cover [3]. A00JF2C126DA 7. Remove three screws [1], and slide the intermediate transport roller assy [2] to the direction as shown in the illustration to remove it.

  • Page 197: Main Drive Unit

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.35 Main drive unit 1. Remove the fusing unit. See P.60 2. Remove the transfer belt motor. See P.55 3. Remove the color PC drum motor. See P.207 4. Remove the color developing motor. See P.208 5.
  • Page 198 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 12. Remove the harness from eight wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2], and disconnect the connector [3]. A00JF2C130DA 13. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the gear [2]. A00JF2C131DA 14. Remove four screws [1], and remove the fusing pressure retraction unit [2].

  • Page 199: Lcc Drive Unit

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Remove three screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. A00JF2C133DA 16. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the main drive unit [2]. A00JF2C134DA NOTE • When the color PC drum motor is removed to take out the main drive unit, make sure to adjust the positioning of the PC drive gear when mounting the color PC drum motor.
  • Page 200 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 4. Remove two E-rings [1], the C-clip [2], the bearing [3] and the gear [4]. A00JF2C136DA 5. Disconnect two connectors [2], and remove the harness from two edge covers [1]. A00JF2C137DA 6. Remove the harness from six wire saddles [1].
  • Page 201 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. Remove three screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. A00JF2C139DA 8. Disconnect three connectors [1]. A00JF2C140DA 9. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2]. A00JF2C141DA...
  • Page 202 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2]. A00JF2C142DA 11. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2]. A00JF2C143DA 12. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].
  • Page 203 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1]. A00JF2C145DA 15. Remove three wire saddles [1]. A00JF2C146DA 16. Disconnect the connector [1]. 17. Remove seven screws [2], and remove the power supply code unit [3].
  • Page 204 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 18. Remove seven screws [1] of the LCC drive unit. A00JF2C147DA 19. Remove the LCC drive unit [2] clear- ing the harness [1]. A00JF2C148DA...

  • Page 205: Ir Assy

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.37 IR assy 1. Remove the IR left cover. See P.113 2. Remove the IR front cover. See P.114 3. Remove the IR right cover. See P.113 4. Remove the IR rear cover. See P.113 5.
  • Page 206 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 10. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the harness from five wire saddles [1]. A00JF2C428DA 11. Loosen the two screws [1] and remove the connector [2]. A00JF2C566DA 12. Remove three screws [1] that fix the IR cable.

  • Page 207: Scanner Relay Board (Reyb/Scan)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 13. Remove eight screws [1], and remove IR assy [2]. A00JF2C430DA 6.3.38 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) 1. Remove the IR upper rear cover. See P.113 2. Disconnect five connectors [1] and the flat cable [2]. A00JF2C149DA 3.

  • Page 208: Original Glass Position Control Board (Ogpcb)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.39 Original glass position control board (OGPCB) 1. Remove the IR upper rear cover. See P.113 2. Disconnect three connectors [1]. A00JF2C151DA 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the original glass position control board [2].

  • Page 209: Image Processing Board (Ipb)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Remove four screws [1] to take out the Inverter board assy [2]. A00JF2C154DA 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the inverter board [2]. A00JF2C155DA 6.3.41 Image processing board (IPB) 1. Remove the original glass. See P.114 2.
  • Page 210 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the image processing board [1]. A00JF2C157DA 4. Loosen two screws [1], unplug the IR cable connector [2]. A00JF2C158DA 5. Remove the two bolts [1]. A00JF2C579DA...

  • Page 211: Ph Relay Board (Reyb/Ph)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove six screws [1], and remove the image processing board [2]. NOTE • When the image processing board is replaced, make sure to update the firmware. A00JF2C159DA 6.3.42 PH relay board (REYB/PH) 1.

  • Page 212: Paper Feed/Transport Drive Board (Pftdb)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the PH relay board [1]. A00JF2C162DA 6. Remove five screws [1], and remove the PH relay board [2]. A00JF2C163DA 6.3.43 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) 1.

  • Page 213: Dc Power Supply (Dcpu)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the paper feed/transport drive board [1]. A00JF2C164DA 6. Remove two wire saddles [1]. 7. Remove six screws [2], and remove the paper feed/transport drive board [3].
  • Page 214 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2]. A00JF2C167DA 7. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from two wire saddles [2] and the edge cover [3]. A00JF2C168DA 8.
  • Page 215 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 9. Remove the harness from five wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. A00JF2C170DA 10. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1]. A00JF2C171DA 11. Remove all the connectors on the DC power supply [1].

  • Page 216: Relay Drive Board (Redb)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 12. Remove five screws [1]. A00JF2C173DA 13. Clearing the harness, hold up the DC power supply [1] to remove it. A00JF2C174DA 6.3.45 Relay drive board (REDB) 1. Remove the DC power supply. See P.160 2.

  • Page 217: Printer Control Board (Prcb)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Remove five screws [1], and remove the relay drive board [2]. A00JF2C176DA 6.3.46 Printer control board (PRCB) 1. Remove the upper rear cover /2. See P.116 2. Remove fifteen screws [1], and remove the printer control board pro- tective shield [2].
  • Page 218 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Remove the harness from eleven wire saddles [1]. NOTE • When reinstall the harness, set the ferrite core [2] and route the har- ness as shown in the illustration on the left. A00JF2C178DA 4.

  • Page 219: Slide Interface Board (Reyb/Sl)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.47 Slide interface board (REYB/SL) 1. Remove the upper rear cover /2. See P.116 2. Remove nine screws [1], and hold up the printer control board assy [2] to remove it. A00JF2C181DA 3.

  • Page 220: Fan Motor Relay Board (Reyb/Fan)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Remove five screws [1]. A00JF2C184DA 6. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the slide interface board [2]. A00JF2C185DA 6.3.48 Fan motor relay board (REYB/FAN) 1. Open the printer control board assy and put it to the hook of the machine frame. See the steps 1 to 3 of slide interface board removing procedure.

  • Page 221: Pci Board (Pcib)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the fan motor relay board [2]. A00JF2C187DA 6.3.49 PCI board (PCIB) 1. Remove the upper rear cover /2. See P.116 2. Remove the rear right cover /1. See P.115 3.

  • Page 222: Mfp Board (Mfpb)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Remove the support parts [1]. A00JF2C190DA 6. Remove six screws [1], and remove the PCI board [2]. A00JF2C191DA 6.3.50 MFP board (MFPB) 1. Remove the PCI board assy. See the steps 1 to 4 of PCI board removing procedure. See P.168 2.
  • Page 223 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Disconnect two connectors [3], and remove the harness from the wire saddle [1] and the edge cover [2]. A00JF2C194DA 4. Remove six screws [1] and six bolts [2], and remove the port bracket [3]. A00JF2C195DA 5.
  • Page 224 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 8. Remove two memories [1] on the MFP board. A00JF2C198DA 9. Remove the JMP board [1] on the MFP board. A00JF2C199DA 10. Remove the NVRAM board [1] on the MFP board. NOTE •...

  • Page 225: How To Open Pwb Box

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.51 How to open PWB box 1. Remove the upper rear cover /2. See P.116 2. Remove the rear right cover /1. See P.115 3. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and the edge cover [3].

  • Page 226: High Voltage Unit/2 (Hv2)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other NOTE • When closing the PWB box [1], make sure that the edge cover [2] is closed as shown in the illustration on the left. A00JF2C599DA 6.3.52 High voltage unit/2 (HV2) 1. Open the PWB box. See P.172 2.
  • Page 227 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Remove five screws [1], and remove two harness guides [2]. A00JF2C207DA 4. Remove five screws [1] and four tap- ping screws [2], and remove the high voltage unit/2 [3]. A00JF2C208DA...

  • Page 228: Service Eeprom Board (Sv Erb)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.53 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) 1. Open the PWB box. See P.172 2. Remove two screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and take out the service EEPROM board [3]. A00JF2C209DA NOTE After replacing the service EEPROM board, all parts shown below are required to be replaced with new ones.
  • Page 229 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 NOTE • After replacing the service EEPROM board, be sure to make the above listed adjustments before the first warm-up is made. 5. Turn OFF the main power switch and sub power switch. 6.

  • Page 230: High Voltage Unit/1 (Hv1)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.54 High voltage unit/1 (HV1) 1. Remove the upper rear cove /1, upper rear cover /2 and lower rear cover. See P.116 2. Remove the rear right cove /1, rear right cove /2, rear right cove /3 and rear right cove / See P.115 3.
  • Page 231 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. A00JF2C212DA 8. Disconnect eight connectors. A00JF2C213DA 9. Remove four screws [1], and remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy [2].
  • Page 232 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 10. Remove five cable holders [1] and clear the flat cables [2]. A00JF2C215DA 11. Remove four screws [1] and take out the reinforcing plate [2]. A00JF2C216DA 12. Disconnect four connectors [2] on the high voltage unit/1 [1].
  • Page 233 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 13. Disconnect four connectors [1]. NOTE • When reinstalling the connectors, hang the harness [2] on the hook. Be sure to take the slack out of the harness. A00JF2C218DA 14. Remove four screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2].
  • Page 234 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 16. Remove three screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2]. A00JF2C220DA 17. Disconnect the connector [2] on the high voltage unit/1 [1]. A00JF2C221DA 18. Remove nine screws [1]. A00JF2C222DA...
  • Page 235 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Unhook two tabs [1] and remove the high voltage unit/1 [2]. A00JF2C223DA...

  • Page 236: Ih Power Supply (Ihpu)

    The terminal leakage may cause fire. A00JF2C460DA A: The harness with the longest orange color (blue color for bizhub C650) is installed with the M4 screw. B: The harness with orange color (blue color for bizhub C650) is installed with the M4 screw.
  • Page 237 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Remove the right front cover. See P.109 4. Remove the paper exit rear cover. See P.112 5. Disconnect two connectors [1]. A00JF2C228DA 6. Remove the screw [1]. A00JF2C229DA 7. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the IH power supply protective shield [2].
  • Page 238 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 8. Remove six screws [1] and remove the terminals of each harness. A00JF2C231DA 9. Disconnect two connectors [1]. A00JF2C232DA...

  • Page 239: Operation Panel Inverter Board (Opinvb)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the IH power supply [2]. A00JF2C233DA 6.3.56 Operation panel inverter board (OPINVB) 1. Remove the control panel assy. See P.117 2. Remove five screws [1], and remove the control panel lower cover [2].

  • Page 240: Operation Panel Control Board (Opcb)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.57 Operation panel control board (OPCB) 1. Remove the control panel assy. See P.117 2. Remove the control panel lower cover. See the step 2 of operation panel control board removing procedure. See P.187 3.

  • Page 241: Operation Panel I/O Board (Opiob)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove two bolts [1] and three screws [2], and take out the opera- tion panel control board [3]. A00JF2C239DA 6.3.58 Operation panel I/O board (OPIOB) 1. Remove the LCD module. See P.122 2.

  • Page 242: Paper Size Detect Board/2 (Psdtb/2)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 4. Disconnect the connector [1]. 5. Unhook two tabs [2] and remove the paper size detect board/1 assy [3]. A00JF2C242DA 6. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper size detect board/1 [2]. A00JF2C243DA 6.3.60 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)

  • Page 243: Jpeg Board (Jpegb) *Bizhub C650 Only

    A00JF2C245DA 6. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper size detect board/2 [2]. A00JF2C243DA 6.3.61 JPEG board (JPEGB) *bizhub C650 only 1. Remove the interface cover. See P.115 2. Remove the rear right cover/1. See P.115 3. Disconnect the IR connector [1], and remove the IR cable from the wire saddle [2].

  • Page 244: Sif Board (Sifb)/Eif Board (Eifb) *Bizhub C650 Only

    A00HF2C507DB 5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the JPEG board [2]. A00HF2C508DA 6.3.62 SIF board (SIFB)/EIF board (EIFB) *bizhub C650 only 1. Remove the rear right cover/2. See P.115 2. Remove the rear right cover /1. See P.115 3. Remove fifteen screws [1], and remove the MFP board protective shield [2].
  • Page 245 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Remove two shoulder screws [1]. A00HF2C502DB 5. Remove two screws [1]. A00HF2C503DB 6. Remove the board assy [1]. A00HF2C504DA...

  • Page 246: Adu Transport Motor/1 (M31)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 7. Remove the SIF board [1] and the EIF board [2]. A00HF2C505DA 6.3.63 ADU transport motor/1 (M31) 1. Remove the duplex unit. See P.126 2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from two wire saddles [2] and the edge cover [3].

  • Page 247: Adu Transport Motor/2 (M32)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the ADU transport motor/1 [2]. A00JF2C249DA 6.3.64 ADU transport motor/2 (M32) 1. Remove the duplex unit. See P.126 2. Disconnect the connector [1]. A00JF2C250DA 3. Remove six screws [1], and remove the ADU transport motor/2 assy [2].

  • Page 248: Bypass Tray Up Down Motor (M28) / Bypass Paper Feed Motor (M27)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the ADU transport motor/2 [2]. A00JF2C252DA 6.3.65 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass paper feed motor (M27) 1. Remove the manual bypass tray unit. See P.127 2.
  • Page 249 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Disconnect two connectors [1]. A00JF2C257DA NOTE <1> • When reinstalling the harness and connectors which were removed in step 4, route the harnesses follow- ing the procedure shown in the illustrations on the left. <1>...
  • Page 250 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. A00JF2C258DA 6. Remove six screws [1]. A00JF2C259DA 7. Pull the manual bypass tray drive assy [1] to the direction shown as the illustration to remove it.
  • Page 251 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Remove the screw [1] and the con- nector [2], and take out the bypass tray up down motor [3]. A00JF2C261DA 9. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1] and the edge cover [2]. 10.

  • Page 252: Scanner Motor (M201)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.66 Scanner motor (M201) A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the IR rear cover. See P.113 2. Remove the IR upper rear cover /1. See P.113 3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the harnesses from two wire sad- dles [2].
  • Page 253 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove six screws and take out the ADF table [2]. A00JF2C266DA 7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove three screws [2]. A00JF2C267DA 8. Remove the spring [1] and the belt [2], and take out the scanner motor assy [3].
  • Page 254 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the scanner motor [2]. A00JF2C269DA B. Reinstall procedure 1. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with three screws [2]. A00JF3C538DA 2. With the scanner drive gear set screw [1] located on the right-hand side as shown on the left, slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the left and...

  • Page 255: Original Glass Moving Motor (M202)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.67 Original glass moving motor (M202) 1. Remove the IR rear cover. See P.113 2. Remove the IR upper rear cover /1 and IR upper rear cover /2. See P.113 3. Disconnect the connector [1]. A00JF2C575DA 4.
  • Page 256 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the original glass moving motor assy [2]. A00JF2C578DA 7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the original glass moving motor [2]. A00JF2C574DA...

  • Page 257: Waste Toner Agitating Motor (M20)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.68 Waste toner agitating motor (M20) 1. Remove the PH relay board. See P.158 2. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1]. A00JF2C271DA 3. Remove two screws [2] of the bracket [1]. A00JF2C272DA 4.

  • Page 258: Transport Motor (M25)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.69 Transport motor (M25) 1. Remove the lower rear cover. See P.116 2. Remove the rear right cover /2 and rear right cover /4. See P.115 3. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].

  • Page 259: Vertical Transport Motor (M26)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.70 Vertical transport motor (M26) 1. Remove the lower rear cover. See P.116 2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from two wire saddles [2]. A00JF2C277DA 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the vertical transport motor assy [2].

  • Page 260: Transfer Belt Motor (M1)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.71 Transfer belt motor (M1) 1. Open the PWB box. See P.172 2. Remove four screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and take out the transfer belt motor [3]. A00JF2C280DA 6.3.72 Color PC drum motor (M16) 1.

  • Page 261: Color Developing Motor (M17)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.73 Color developing motor (M17) 1. Open the PWB box. See P.172 2. Remove four screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and take out the color developing motor [3]. A00JF2C282DA 6.3.74 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) 1.

  • Page 262: Registration Motor (M2)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 4. Remove the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor assy [1]. A00JF2C285DA 5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor [2]. A00JF2C286DA 6.3.75 Registration motor (M2) 1.
  • Page 263 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the harness from the wire saddle [2]. 4. Remove two screws [3] and take out the pressure welding alienation sen- sor assy [4]. A00JF2C287DA 5. Remove two screws [1] and the spring [2], and remove the gear cover [3].

  • Page 264: Fusing Pressure Retraction Motor (M29)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 7. Remove two screws [1], and take out the shaft metal plate [2]. A00JF2C290DA 8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the registration motor [2]. A00JF2C291DA 6.3.76 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) 1.

  • Page 265: Fusing Motor (M30)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.77 Fusing motor (M30) 1. Open the PWB box. See P.172 2. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1]. A00JF2C293DA 3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. A00JF2C294DA 4.
  • Page 266 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the edge cover [2]. A00JF2C296DA 6. Disconnect two connectors [1]. A00JF2C297DA 7. Remove four screws [1], and remove the fan motor assy /1 [2]. A00JF2C298DA...

  • Page 267: Switchback Motor (M33)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Remove four screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and remove the fusing motor [3]. A00JF2C299DA 6.3.78 Switchback motor (M33) 1. Remove the fan motor assy /1. See the steps 1 to 7 of fusing motor removing procedure. See P.212 2.

  • Page 268: Exit Motor (M4)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.79 Exit motor (M4) 1. Remove the fan motor assy /1. See the steps 1 to 7 of fusing motor removing procedure. See P.212 2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].

  • Page 269: K Pc Drum Motor (M18)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.80 K PC drum motor (M18) 1. Take out the reinforcing plate. See the steps 1 to 11 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. See P.177 2. Open the upper right door. 3.

  • Page 270: K Developing Motor (M19)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.81 K developing motor (M19) 1. Remove the fan motor assy /2. See the steps 1 to 5 of K PC drum motor removing procedure. See P.216 2. Remove four screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and remove the K devel- oping motor [3].

  • Page 271: Tray2 Lift-Up Motor (M8)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the tray1 lift-up motor [2]. A00JF2C312DA 6.3.83 Tray2 lift-up motor (M8) 1. Remove the tray1/2. See P.121 2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the edge cover [2].

  • Page 272: Tray3 Lift-Up Motor (M23)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the tray 2 lift-up motor [2]. A00JF2C312DA 6.3.84 Tray3 lift-up motor (M23) 1. Remove the LCC drive unit. See P.146 2. Remove two screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and remove the tray 3 lift- up motor [3].

  • Page 273: Tray1 Vertical Transport Motor (M5)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.86 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) 1. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy. See the steps 1 to 9 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. See P.177 2. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the harness from two wire saddles [1].

  • Page 274: Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor (M7)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.87 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) 1. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy. See the steps 1 to 9 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. See P.177 2. Remove the LCC drive unit. See P.146 3.

  • Page 275: Take-Up Motor (M22)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.88 Take-up motor (M22) 1. Slide out tray 1/2. 2. Remove the reinforcing plate. See the steps 1 to 11 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. See P.177 3. Remove the tray 1 paper feed unit. See the steps 1 to 6 of tray 1 feed roller replacement procedure.

  • Page 276: Charge Cleaning Motor/K (M15)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the take-up motor [2]. A00JF2C325DA 6.3.89 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) 1. Remove the imaging unit K. See P.49 2. Remove the sensor unit. See the steps 1 to 5 of IDC registration sensor/F and IDC registration sensor/R remov- ing procedure.
  • Page 277 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the charge cleaning motor/K assy [2]. A00JF2C327DA 5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the gear assy [2]. A00JF2C328DA 6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the charge cleaning motor/K [2].

  • Page 278: Cleaner Motor (M38)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.90 Cleaner motor (M38) 1. Remove the fan motor assy /1. See the steps 1 to 7 of fusing motor removing procedure. See P.212 2. Take out the paper exit rear cover. See P.112 3.
  • Page 279 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. Disconnect the connector [1]. 8. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [2]. A00JF2C333DA 9. Remove four screws [1], and take out the fan motor assy/4 [2] as clearing the harness. A00JF2C334DA 10.
  • Page 280 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 11. Remove three screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2]. A00JF2C336DA 12. Remove two connectors [2] on the high voltage unit/2 [1]. A00JF2C337DA 13. Remove two screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2]. A00JF2C338DA...
  • Page 281 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1], and take out the connec- tor [3] on the high voltage unit/2 [2]. A00JF2C339DA 15. Remove five screws [1] and four tap- ping screws [2], and remove the high voltage unit/2 [3].
  • Page 282 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 17. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1]. A00JF2C341DA 18. Close the PWB box once and remove two screws [1] of the cleaner motor. A00JF2C342DA 19. Open the PWB box again, remove two screws [1] and the connector [2], and take out the cleaner motor [3].

  • Page 283: 1St Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor (M21)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.91 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) 1. Remove the high voltage unit/2 assy. See the steps 1 to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure. See P.225 2. Remove two screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and take out the 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor [3].

  • Page 284: Toner Cartridge Motor Y/M (M13)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.93 Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13) 1. Remove the high voltage unit/2 Assy. See the steps 1 to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure. See P.225 2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove three screws [2], then remove the toner cartridge motor Y/ M Assy[3].

  • Page 285: Toner Supply Motor/Y (M9), Toner Supply Motor/M (M10), Toner Supply Motor/C (M11), Toner Supply Motor/K (M12)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.94 Toner supply motor/Y (M9), toner supply motor/M (M10), toner supply motor/C (M11), toner supply motor/K (M12) 1. Remove the upper front door. See P.105 2. Remove the upper left cover. See P.111 3.
  • Page 286 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 8. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness [2]. A00JF2C350DA 9. Remove the screw [1] and take out the hinge convex part [2]. A00JF2C351DA 10. Remove three screws [1], and take out the toner cartridge inserting port cover Y/M/C [2].
  • Page 287 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 11. Remove nine screws [1], and pull the front cover [2] forward slowly. NOTE • Use care not to mistake in the kind of the screws. A00JF2C353DA 12. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1], and remove the front cover [2].
  • Page 288 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 14. Disconnect the connector [1]. A00JF2C356DA 15. Remove the screw [1], and remove the front door switch assy[2], then remove the harness from the wire saddle [3]. A00JF2C357DA 16. Remove six screws [1], and remove the toner hopper units assy [2].

  • Page 289: Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (Cl1)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 17. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove four screws [2], then remove the toner hopper unit /Y [3]. [1] [2] A00JF2C359DA 18. Remove two screws [1] and discon- nect the connector [2], and remove the toner supply motor /Y [3].

  • Page 290: Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch 2 (Cl2)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 1 paper feed clutch [2]. NOTE • When mounting the tray 1 paper feed clutch, set the convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the tray 1 paper feed clutch.

  • Page 291: Horizontal Transport Clutch 1 (Cl3)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.97 Horizontal transport clutch 1 (CL3) 1. Remove the LCC drive unit. See P.146 2. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the horizontal transport clutch 1 [2]. NOTE • When mounting the horizontal transport clutch 1, set the convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the horizontal transport...

  • Page 292: Tray 3 Paper Feed Clutch (Cl5)/Tray 3 Transport Clutch (Cl6)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.99 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)/Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6) 1. Slide out the tray 3. 2. Remove two screws [1] and pull out the tray 3 [2] to the end. A00JF2C028DA 3.

  • Page 293: Tray 4 Paper Feed Clutch (Cl7)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.100 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7) 1. Slide out the tray 4. 2. Remove two screws [1] and pull out the tray 4 [2] to the end. A00JF2C034DA 3. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1], and disconnect the con- nector [2].

  • Page 294: Idc Registration Sensor/F (Idcs/F), Idc Registration Sensor/R (Idcs/R)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.101 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F), IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R). 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Remove the image transfer entrance guide. See the steps 1 to 4 of image transfer belt unit removing procedure. See P.55 3.
  • Page 295 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove seven screws [1] and the spring [2], and remove the sensor cover [3]. A00JF2C368DA 7. Remove two screws [1], and discon- nect the connector [2], then remove the IDC registration sensor/F [3]. A00JF2C369DA 8.

  • Page 296: Scanner Drive Cables

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.102 Scanner drive cables A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the IR assy. See P.152 2. Remove the scanner assy. See P.135 3. Remove the scanner motor. See P.199 4. Remove the original glass moving unit. See P.131 5.
  • Page 297 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. Remove the hook side spring [1] of the scanner drive cables. A00JF2C435DA 8. Remove the bead side [1] of the scanner drive cables from the adjust- ment anchor. A00JF2C436DA 9. Remove the C-ring [1] and bearing [2].
  • Page 298 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the scanner drive gear [2]. 11. Remove the bearing [3]. A00JF2C438DA 12. Remove the shaft [1] and pulleys [2]. A00JF2C439DA 13. Remove the screw [1] one each and take out the two pulleys [2] from the shaft.
  • Page 299 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 B. reinstall procedure (1) Overall figure A00JF2C441DA (2) Winding of the scanner drive cables NOTE • The scanner drive cable differs in type between the front (silver) and the rear (black), which are colored differently. <Front>...
  • Page 300 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the rear groove in clockwise direction five times. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
  • Page 301 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the rear groove in anticlockwise direction five times. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
  • Page 302 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 9. Put the front/rear pulleys [1] into the shaft [2], and fix them with one screw each [3]. NOTE • Set the pulley at the direction as shown in the illustration. • Fix the pulley at the position as shown in the illustration.
  • Page 303 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Front> 13. Place the fixed bead side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley B [2], and place the fixed bead to the adjustment anchor [3]. NOTE • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside groove of the pulley B.
  • Page 304 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 16. Place the scanner drive cable to the pulley D [2] via the pulley C [1]. NOTE • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside groove of the pulley D [2]. A00JF2C449DA 17.
  • Page 305 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Front> 19. Place the hook side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley A [2]. A00JF2C445DA 20. Place the scanner drive cable to the pulley B [2] via the pulley A [1]. NOTE •...
  • Page 306 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 22. Remove the end of the spring [1] from the hook. Hook the end of the spring to the wire coming from the front. A00JF2C462DA 23. Remove the tape that fixes the front/rear pulleys. 24.

  • Page 307: Tray 3/4 Lift Wire

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.103 Tray 3/4 lift wire NOTE • The tray 3 and 4 are of the same form and mechanism. This procedure shows the steps taken for the tray 3. 1. Remove the tray from the main body. See P.122 2.
  • Page 308 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear cover [2], and take out the gear Assy [3]. A00JF2C406DA 5. Remove the bearing [1]. A00JF2C407DA...
  • Page 309 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /2 (white) [4] from the shaft [3]. [1] [2] [4] A00JF2C408DA 7. Remove the E-ring [1]. 8.
  • Page 310 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 9. Remove the E-ring [1]. 10. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3], and then remove the wire /2 (white) [4]. 11. Pull out and remove the wire /2 (white) toward the rear side of the lift plate [5].
  • Page 311 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /3 (black) [4] from the shaft [3]. A00JF2C412DA 15. Remove the E-ring [1]. 16.
  • Page 312 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 18. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /4 (white) [4] from the shaft [3]. A00JF2C414DA 19. Remove the E-ring [1]. 20.

  • Page 313: Fuse (F1) *Usa Only

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.104 Fuse (F1) *USA only NOTE • When the fuse is replaced, use the following fuse to be replaced. Fuse (F1): Littelfuse, Inc., Type: KLDR 6, 600Vac, 6 A, Class CC, Time delay fuse) A.

  • Page 314: Cleaning Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the ethanol isopropyl alcohol. 6.4.1 Transfer belt unit 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. See P.55 2. Using a dried soft cloth, wipe the transfer belt [1].

  • Page 315: Tray 1 Separation Roller

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C373DA 6.4.3 Tray 1 separation roller 1. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 of tray 1 separation roller assy replacement procedure.

  • Page 316: Tray 2 Feed Roller/Tray 2 Pick-Up Roller

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.4.5 Tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller 1. Open the lower right door. 2. Remove the tray 2 separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 of tray 2 separation roller assy replacement procedure. See P.38 3.

  • Page 317: Tray 2 Transport Roller

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.4.7 Tray 2 transport roller 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 transport roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C378DA 6.4.8 Tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller 1.

  • Page 318: Tray 3 Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 3 pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C380DA 6.4.9 Tray 3 separation roller 1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. See the steps 1 to 4 of tray 3 feed roller replacement procedure. See P.39 2.

  • Page 319: Tray 4 Feed Roller/Tray 4 Pick-Up Roller

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 3 transport roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C382DA 6.4.11 Tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller 1. Slide out the tray 4. 2.

  • Page 320: Tray 4 Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.4.12 Tray 4 separation roller 1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. See the steps 1 to 4 of tray 4 feed roller replacement procedure. See P.42 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 4 separation roller [1] clean of dirt.

  • Page 321: Manual Bypass Tray Pick-Up Roller

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.4.15 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the manual bypass tray pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C388DA 6.4.16 Manual bypass tray separation roller 1.

  • Page 322: Scanner Rails

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.4.18 Original glass 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the original glass [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C521DA 2. Clean the slit glass [2] with the cleaner [1]. A00JF2C522DB 6.4.19 Scanner rails 1.

  • Page 323: Mirrors (1St/2Nd/3Rd)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6.4.20 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) 1. Remove the original glass. See P.114 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the mirror 1 [1] and mirror 2/3 [2]. A00JF2C392DA 6.4.21 Lens 1. Remove the original glass. See P.114 2.

  • Page 324: Ccd Sensor

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.4.22 CCD sensor 1. Remove the original glass. See P.114 2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the image processing board protec- tive shield [2]. A00JF2C156DA 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the CCD sensor cover [2].

  • Page 325: Mount The Original Size Detection 2 Sensor (Ps205)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Mount the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205) 1. Remove the original glass. See P.114 2. Using the screw [2], mount the origi- nal size detection 2 sensor (PS205) [1] and fix it. A00JF2E595DB <How to set the harness>...
  • Page 326 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Select [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Original Size Detection], and set the original glass to [Table2]. A00JF2E587DA 4. Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj]. See P.446 A00JF2E588DA 5.

  • Page 327: Lubrication Procedure

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Lubrication procedure 6.6.1 Fusing unit • When the fusing unit produces abnormal noise under operating conditions, lubricate the brush roller shaft and the sliding member of the bearings which can make the noise. 1.
  • Page 328 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Apply the heat resistant conductive grease (SANKOL ECG-25) to the surface [1] where the brush roller shaft contacts the bearings. NOTE • Be sure to use heat-resistant conductive grease. • Do not allow the grease to contact the brush roller. •...

  • Page 329: Option Counter

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Option counter 6.7.1 Installation method for the key counter 1. Remove the upper front cover /1. See P.108 2. Remove the upper front cover /2. See P.108 3. Remove the IR upper front cover. See P.113 4.
  • Page 330 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6. Remove the harness [2] for the key counter from three wire saddles [1]. 7. Fix the harness of the remainder to three wire saddles [1] again. A00JF2C591DA 8. Route the harness for the key counter [1] as shown in the illustra- tion on the left and let the harness out through the hole of the IR right...
  • Page 331 6. Other Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Connect the key counter socket con- nector [1]. 11. Using two screws [3], secure the counter socket [2]. A00JF2C594DA 12. Using two screws [1], secure the key counter cover [2]. A00JF2C584DA 13.

  • Page 332: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks •...

  • Page 333: Utility Mode

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Touch Panel Adjustment Functions • To adjust the position of the touch panel display • Make this adjustment if the touch panel is slow to respond to a pressing action. •...

  • Page 334: Utility Mode Function Tree

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode function tree * The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen. NOTE • Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting. •...
  • Page 335 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page User Settings Custom Copier Default Tab P.302 Display Settings Shortcut Key 1 P.302 Settings Shortcut Key 2 Scan/Fax Default Tab P.303 Settings Program Default P.303 Address Book Index Default P.303 Shortcut Key 1 P.303...
  • Page 336 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page User Settings Printer Basic PDL Setting P.312 Settings Settings Number of Copies P.312 Original Direction P.312 Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP P.312 A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch P.313 Banner Sheet Setting P.313...
  • Page 337 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Power Save Low Power Mode Settings P.319 Settings Settings Settings Sleep Mode Settings P.319 Power Save Key P.319 Enter Power Save Mode P.320 Output Print P.320 Print/Fax Out- Settings...
  • Page 338 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Expert Finisher 2-Position Staple Pitch P.331 Setting Setting Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Center Staple Position Half-Fold Position Tri-Fold Position Adjustment Punch Vertical Position Adjustment Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment...
  • Page 339 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Expert Scanner Area Scanner Adjustment: P.337 Settings Setting Adjustment Leading Edge *** Scanner Adjustment: P.338 Centering *** Horizontal Adjustment *** P.339 Vertical Adjustment *** P.340 ADF Adjust- Centering*** P.340...
  • Page 340 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator One-Touch/ Create One- Address Book E-mail P.349 Setting User Box Touch Desti- User Box P.350 Registration nation P.350 PC (SMB) P.350 P.350 WebDAV P.350 IP Address Fax P.350 Internet Fax P.351...
  • Page 341 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Network TCP/IP Settings P.362 Settings Settings NetWare Settings P.368 HTTP Server Settings P.371 FTP Settings P.372 SMB Settings P.374 LDAP Enabling LDAP P.376 Settings Setting Up LDAP P.376 Default LDAP Server Setting P.379...
  • Page 342 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Printer USB Timeout P.399 Settings Settings Network Timeout P.399 Print XPS Errors P.400 Header Information P.400 Settings Header/ Header Position P.400 Footer Print Receiver’s Name P.400 Position Footer Position P.401...
  • Page 343 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Report Activity Report P.408 Settings Settings Settings TX Result Report P.408 Sequential TX Report P.408 Timer Reservation TX Report P.408 Confidential RX Report P.409 Bulletin TX Report P.409 Relay TX Result Report P.409...
  • Page 344 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Security Administrator Password P.415 Settings Settings User Box Administrator Setting P.416 Administrator Security Levels P.416 Security Password Rules P.417 Details Prohibited Functions When Authentication P.418 Error Confidential Document Access Method P.419 Manual Destination Input...
  • Page 345 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page ⎯ Meter Count Check Print List Details ⎯ Coverage Rate ⎯ Copy ⎯ Print ⎯ Scan/Fax ⎯ Other ⎯ Remaining Copy Count *1 *1: Displayed after a user or account authentication if maximum limit is set for the number of copies the user or account can make.

  • Page 346: Utility Mode Function Setting Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode function setting procedure 8.3.1 Procedure 1. Press the Utility/Counter key. 2. The Utility Mode screen will appear. A00JF3E533DA 8.3.2 Exiting • Touch the [Close] key. 8.3.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions •...

  • Page 347: One-Touch User Box Registration

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 One-Touch User Box Registration • In a copier where the user authentication function that uses an external server or MFP is set to ON, when you operate the copier without performing user authentication, this menu is not displayed.
  • Page 348 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (6) WebDAV • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. Functions • To register/change WebDAV address to send scanned data. Setting/ • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. Procedure •...

  • Page 349: Create User Box

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) E-mail Body Functions • To register the e-mail message when transmitting the scanned data. Setting/ • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. Procedure • Select any displayed address to detail check or delete the setting. •...

  • Page 350: Limiting Access To Destinations

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode 8.4.3 Limiting Access to Destinations • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] A. Outline • The Limiting Access to Destinations setting allows or restricts individual user's access to each destination.

  • Page 351: User Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 User Settings 8.5.1 System Settings A. Language Selection Functions • To select the language on the LCD display. • To change the language on the control panel to another language. Setting/ •...
  • Page 352 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (4) Print Lists • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.) •...
  • Page 353 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Sleep Mode Settings Functions • To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control. •...
  • Page 354 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode • When the optional finisher FS-519 is mounted. Functions • To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print Reports). • To change the output tray according to the application. Setting/ •...

  • Page 355: Custom Display Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 H. Auto Paper Select for Small Original Functions • To make the copy setting when the paper is undetectably small, or no original is being set. • To copy the original such as business cards with which the original detection is not effective.
  • Page 356 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode B. Scan/Fax Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Default Tab Functions •...
  • Page 357 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 C. Copy Screen • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, or authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] However, this menu is available when the key counter is installed and [The next job reser- vation] is set to License.

  • Page 358: Copier Settings

    8.5.3 Copier Settings A. Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple • bizhub C650/C550 : It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-608 is mounted. • bizhub C451 : It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-608 or the optional saddle stitcher SD-505 is mounted.
  • Page 359 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 C. Auto Sort/Group Selection Functions • Selects whether to use the auto sort/group selection function when a job has output of two or more sheets. Yes : Automatically disables the Auto sort/group selection when a sheet of original is placed on the ADF and the start key is pressed.
  • Page 360 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode E. Default Enlarge Display Settings • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. • Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] → [User Settings] → [Copier Settings] in the enlarge display mode.
  • Page 361 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 H. Enlargement Rotation • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions • Sets whether to rotate images of which length is more than 297 mm in the main scan direction (in the horizontal direction on the ADF or the Original glass) in the copying process.
  • Page 362 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode L. Select Tray for Insert Sheet • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels] Functions •...

  • Page 363: Scan/Fax Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8.5.4 Scan/Fax Settings A. JPEG Compression Level Functions • To set the JPEG compression method when scanning with JPEG while in scan/fax mode. • To change the compression rate when JPEG scanning. High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning.
  • Page 364 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode D. Default Scan/Fax Settings • This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication devices is set to set in the [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice].

  • Page 365: Printer Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 F. Compact PDF Compression Level Functions • Selects a compression method applied to scanned data that is produced with the use of Compact PDF in the scan/fax mode. • To change the compression ratio applied to scanned data that is produced with the Compact PDF format.
  • Page 366 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch Functions • To set whether to switch between A4 and Letter (8 x 11) size paper, and A3 and Ledger (11 x 17) size paper in reading. •...
  • Page 367 Top Bind “Left Bind” Right Bind (5) Staple • bizhub C650/C550 : The menu is available only when the optional finisher FS-517/518/ 608 is mounted. • bizhub C451 : The menu is available only when the optional finisher FS-517/608 or FS-519 is mounted.
  • Page 368 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (6) Punch • bizhub C650/C550 : The menu is available only when the optional finisher FS-517/518/ 608 and punch kit PK-512/513 is mounted. • bizhub C451 : The menu is available only when the optional finisher FS-517/608 or FS-519 and punch kit PK-510 is mounted.
  • Page 369 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (4) Line/Page Functions • To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data. • To change the number of lines per page for printing the text data. Setting/ •...

  • Page 370: Change Password

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode E. XPS Settings • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. (1) Verify XPS Digital Signature Functions • Selects whether to verify digital signatures attached to XPS (XML Paper Specifica- tion) files when printing the files.

  • Page 371: Change E-Mail Address

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8.5.7 Change E-mail Address • When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete. • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] →...

  • Page 372: Administrator Settings

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Administrator Settings • The Administrator Settings will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the Administrator Settings or Service Mode. (The administrator password is initially set to “12345678.”) NOTE •...
  • Page 373 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (4) Enter Power Save Mode Functions • To set whether to immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of receiving the fax during power save mode. • To immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of receiving the fax during power save mode.
  • Page 374 Procedure Enable “Disable” (4) Shift Output Each Job • bizhub C650/C550 : It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-517/518/608 is mounted. • bizhub C451 : It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-517/608, FS- 519 or the optional job separator JS-504 is mounted.
  • Page 375 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 D. Daylight Saving Time Functions • To set whether to set the daylight saving time. • To set the time difference in setting the daylight saving time. • To set the daylight saving time. Setting/ •...
  • Page 376 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) Password for Non-Business Hours Functions • To set whether to input the password before using when the weekly timer is set. • To set the password for turning the power ON temporarily when the weekly timer is set.
  • Page 377 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Registering and Changing Addresses> Functions • To set whether to allow or restrict the change of the registered address. Setting/ • The default setting is Allow. Procedure “Allow” Restrict NOTE • [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Administrator Settings] →...
  • Page 378 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode G. Expert Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
  • Page 379 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Printer Adjustment <Leading Edge Adjustment> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 380 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Centering> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] •...
  • Page 381 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 382 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)> Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-sided mode. • To use when the optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is set up. •...
  • Page 383 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Vertical Adjustment> • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] Functions • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. •...
  • Page 384 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Media Adjustment> • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type.
  • Page 385 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment> See P.13 of the PK-512/513 service manual. <Punch Unit Vertical Position> See P.32 of the ZU-603 service manual. <Punch Unit Horizontal Position> See P.33 of the ZU-603 service manual. <Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor>...
  • Page 386 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) Image Stabilization <Image Stabilization Only> Functions • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. • Use if an image problem persists even after [Gradation Adjustment] has been exe- cuted.
  • Page 387 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (7) Color Registration Adjust • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 388 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (8) Gradation Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Dev. Bias Choice] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set.
  • Page 389 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (9) Scanner Area • Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section. • If the color chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 390 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge> Functions • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale by varying the scan start posi- tion in the main scan direction.
  • Page 391 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Scanner Adjustment: Centering> Functions • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. • When the CCD unit is replaced. •...
  • Page 392 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Horizontal Adjustment> Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section. • The CCD unit has been replaced. Adjustment •Measure C width on the color chart and on Specification the sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
  • Page 393 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Vertical Adjustment> Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section • The scanner assy has been replaced. • The scanner motor has been replaced. •...
  • Page 394 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (11) Line Detection <Prior Detection Setting> Functions • To set whether or not to perform pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass. • To set the detection level of the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass. •...
  • Page 395 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Detection While Feeding Setting> Functions • To set the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original. • Use when changing the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
  • Page 396 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (12) Trail Edge Adjust Functions • To adjust trail edge if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. • To correct any color shift at trail edge. •...
  • Page 397 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 H. List/Counter (1) Management List • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
  • Page 398 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Reset Settings (1) System Auto Reset Functions • To set the period of time until system auto reset starts functioning. • To change the period of time until system auto reset starts functioning. Setting/ <Priority Mode>...
  • Page 399 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Next Job: Staple Setting> Functions • To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the staple setting job started and the next job setting has become available. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure “OFF”...
  • Page 400 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (4) Encrypted PDF Delete Time Functions • Specifies whether to delete encrypted PDF data stored in the box after a lapse of a predetermined period of time. Sets the time period for which encrypted PDF data can be stored. Setting/ •...
  • Page 401 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 K. Standard Size Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] (1) Original Glass Original Size Detect Functions •...

  • Page 402: Administrator/Machine Settings

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode N. Application Key Settings • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 3 or later firmware is installed. • This is displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-101 or LK-103) is activated. Functions •...
  • Page 403 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <User Box> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.) Functions •...
  • Page 404 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Internet Fax> • Setting will be available only when [Internet FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...
  • Page 405 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 B. Create User Box • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 406 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode C. One-Touch/User Box Registration List • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.

  • Page 407: User Authentication/Account Track

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 D. Maximum Number of User Boxes Functions • Set the maximum of public, personal, and group boxes that individual users can hold. Setting/ 1. Select a user box type and name. Procedure 2.
  • Page 408 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Account Track Functions • To set whether to enable the account track function or not. • To enable the account track function. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure “OFF”...
  • Page 409 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (7) Number of User Counters Assigned • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions •...
  • Page 410 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode B. User Authentication Setting • The settings are available only when carrying out the user authentication. (1) Administrative Setting <User Name List> • It cannot select [OFF] when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Administrator Settings] →...
  • Page 411 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <ID & Print Operation Settings> • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 3 or later firmware is installed. • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device is set to “installed”.
  • Page 412 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode C. Account Track Setting • The settings are available only when carrying out the account track. (1) Account Track Registration Functions • To register and change the account. • To register, change or delete the account for account track. Setting/ 1.
  • Page 413 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 F. External Server Settings Functions • Registers and sets an external server that is used for user authentication. • To make user authentication by external server authentication. Setting/ 1. Select one from No. 1 to No. 20 and touch [NEW]. Procedure 2.
  • Page 414 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode H. Authentication Device Settings • The function can be displayed only when the authentication device 2 is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) General Settings Functions •...

  • Page 415: Network Setting

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Auth/Acct Track Common Setting • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 4 or later firmware is installed. (1) Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting Functions • Select whether or not to display the logout confirmation screen. •...
  • Page 416 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) DNS Host Functions • To set the DNS host name. • To set whether or not to enable the dynamic DNS setting. • To enter the DNS host name. • To set the dynamic DNS. Setting/ <DNS Host Name>...
  • Page 417 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (6) RAW Port Number Functions • To set the RAW port number. • To set the RAW port number for the printer. • Several data can be accepted at the same time by selecting several ports. Setting/ 1.
  • Page 418 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (9) IPv6 Settings Functions • To set whether to use IPv6 in IP network communication. • To set whether to use the IPv6 address automatic acquisition setting. • To set IPv6 addresses. •...
  • Page 419 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <IKE Settings> Functions • To make the settings that relate to IKE (Internet Key Exchange) protocol which is used for IPsec communication. • Settings can be made independently for four different sets (Group 1 to 4). Setting/ <Group>...
  • Page 420 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <IPsec SA Settings> Functions • To make the settings that relate to IPsec SA (Security Association) which is used for IPsec communication. • Settings can be made independently for eight different sets (Group 1 to 8). Setting/ <Group Set Number>...
  • Page 421 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Peer> Functions • To register destinations used for IPsec communication. • Settings can be made independently for different ten sets (Group 1 to 10). Setting/ <Peer> Procedure • Among Group 1 to 10, select a group where settings are made. •...
  • Page 422 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (2) Netware Print Settings Functions • To set whether to use the NetWare print mode. • To set the NetWare print mode. • To display NetWare status. • To change the NetWare print mode. •...
  • Page 423 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (6) P Server Settings: File Server Name Functions • To set the file server name. • To set the full server name for the print server to logon. Setting/ 1. Touch [File Server Name]. Procedure 2.
  • Page 424 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode C. http Server Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) http Server Settings Functions •...
  • Page 425 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (7) IPP Authentication Settings Functions • To set whether or not to use the IPP authentication setting. • To conduct IPP authentication. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON” (8) Authentication Method Functions •...
  • Page 426 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (2) FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Address Functions • To set the proxy server address. • To enter the proxy server address. Setting/ 1. Touch [Host Address]. Procedure 2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input], or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.
  • Page 427 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 E. SMB Setting • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Client Settings Functions •...
  • Page 428 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) Print Settings: Workgroup Functions • To set the workgroup. • To set the workgroup. Setting/ 1. Touch [Workgroup]. Procedure 2. Enter the workgroup (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
  • Page 429 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 F. LDAP Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Enabling LDAP Functions •...
  • Page 430 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Check Connection> • It will not be displayed when [Enabling LDAP] is set to “OFF.” • It will not be displayed when the following is set to “Restrict.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Security Details] → [Manual Destina- tion Input] Functions •...
  • Page 431 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Port Number (SSL)> Functions • To set the port number for LDAP server when using SSL. • To enter the port number for LDAP server when using SSL. Setting/ 1. Touch [Input]. Procedure 2.
  • Page 432 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Login Name> Functions • To set the login name to connect to LDAP server. • To set the login name to connect to LDAP server. Setting/ 1. Touch [Login Name]. Procedure 2.
  • Page 433 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Scan to E-mail> Functions • To set whether or not to transfer scanned data by e-mail. • To use when not transferring scanned data by e-mail. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON”...
  • Page 434 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Connection Timeout> Functions • To set the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server. • To change the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server. Setting/ •...
  • Page 435 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Authentication> Functions • To set whether or not to enable the POP Before SMTP authentication. • To use when conducting POP Before SMTP authentication. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure “OFF”...
  • Page 436 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Port No.> Functions • To set the port No. for transmitting with POP server. • To enter the port No. for transmitting with POP server. Setting/ 1. Touch [Input]. Procedure 2. Touch the Clear key. 3.
  • Page 437 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Polling Interval> Functions • To set a polling interval at which a POP server is checked for new messages. Setting/ • The default setting is 15 minutes. Procedure 1 to 60 minutes (3) S/MIME Communication Settings Functions •...
  • Page 438 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode H. SNMP Setting (1) SNMP Setting Functions • To set whether to use SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) or not. • To set the SNMP version to be used. • Not to use SNMP. •...
  • Page 439 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Discovery User Permissions> Functions • To set whether or not to enable the discovery authority user which is used for SNMP Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON” <Discovery User Name Settings> Functions •...
  • Page 440 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Write User Name Settings> Functions • To set the name of the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3. Setting/ 1. Touch [Write User Name]. Procedure 2. Enter the write user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
  • Page 441 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 AppleTalk Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) AppleTalk Settings Functions •...
  • Page 442 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode K. TCP Socket Settings (1) TCP Socket Functions • To set whether or not to set the TCP socket. • To set the port number for TCP socket transmission. • To use when using the application, etc. for TCP socket transmission. •...
  • Page 443 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Internet Fax Function> • Setting will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings] Functions • To set whether or not to use Internet fax function. •...
  • Page 444 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <WebDAV Client Settings: Proxy Server Address> Functions • To set the proxy server address. • To enter the proxy server address. Setting/ 1. Touch [Host Address]. Procedure 2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input], or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.
  • Page 445 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <WebDAV Server Settings: SSL Setting> Functions • To set whether to use SSL/TSL for communications when using the machine as WebDAV server. Setting/ • The default setting is Non-SSL Only. Procedure “Non-SSL Only”...
  • Page 446 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Printer Settings: Printer Name> Functions • To set the WS printer name. Setting/ 1. Touch [Printer Name]. Procedure 2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
  • Page 447 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Scanner Settings: Scanner Information> Functions • To set the WS scanner information. Setting/ 1. Touch [Scanner Information]. Procedure 2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
  • Page 448 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <NTP Server Setting> Functions • To set the NTP server address. • To enter the NTP server address. Setting/ <Host Address> Procedure 1. Touch [Host Address]. 2. Select [IP Address Input], and enter the IP address. 3.
  • Page 449 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Register Notification Address (E-mail Address)> Functions • To set E-mail addresses to which machine status notifications are sent. • Use this function when setting E-mail addresses to which machine status notifica- tions are sent.
  • Page 450 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) PING Confirmation Functions • To set the TCP/IP network diagnosis by PING. • To check the condition of TCP/IP network. Setting/ 1. Touch [Host Address] for PING transmission. Procedure 2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input], or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.

  • Page 451: Copier Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8.6.6 Copier Settings A. Auto Zoom (Platen) Functions • To set whether to function the auto zoom when the tray is selected with document set on the original glass (excepting at automatic paper selection mode.) •...

  • Page 452: Printer Settings

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode F. Tri-Fold Print Side • It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-608 is mounted. Functions • Specifies the side of copies to be folded. Inside : Folds paper in three with the printed side in. Outside : Folds paper in three with the printed side out.

  • Page 453: Fax Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 C. Print XPS Errors • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. Functions • To set whether to print error information when an error occurs while printing a XPS file.
  • Page 454 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Footer Position Functions • To set whether to print the footer when transmitting fax. • To print the footer when transmitting fax. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure Inside Body Text Outside Body Text “OFF”...
  • Page 455 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (4) Number of Redials Functions • To set the number of redials. • To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy, etc. • The line which can be set up is different depending on the country. Setting/ •...
  • Page 456 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Print Paper Selection Functions • To set the priority for paper feed tray when receiving fax. • To change the priority for paper feed tray when receiving fax. Auto select : Selected automatically Priority Size : Printed on size with priority.
  • Page 457 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (8) Print Separate Fax Pages • It will not be displayed when [Duplex print (RX)] is set to “ON.” Functions • To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size.
  • Page 458 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Relay Printing> • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions • To set whether to use the relay print function. •...
  • Page 459 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Memory RX Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Compulsory Memory RX] •...
  • Page 460 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) Incomplete TX Hold • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Re-Transmission] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 2 is mounted.
  • Page 461 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 F. PBX Connection Setting Functions • To set whether to use PBX connection setting or not. • This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line. Setting/ • The default setting is No. Procedure •...
  • Page 462 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) Confidential RX Report Functions • To set whether to print out the confidential RX report. • To print out the confidential RX report. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON”...
  • Page 463 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (10) Broadcast Result Report Functions • To set the format to output the broadcast result report. • To print out the broadcast result report All Destinations : Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses Each Destination : Outputs a report after each transmission Setting/ •...
  • Page 464 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (15) Print E-mail Message Body • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...
  • Page 465 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 <Line Monitor Sound> Functions • To set whether or not to output the line monitor sound of the expanded line from the speaker. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON”...
  • Page 466 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode J. Network Fax Settings • It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] (1) Black Compression Level •...

  • Page 467: System Connection

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (3) I-Fax Advanced Settings • It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...

  • Page 468: Security Settings

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) SSL • It will be displayed when certificate is issued from PageScope Web Connection. Functions • To set whether to encrypt access from other systems by SSL when using Page Scope Data Administrator.
  • Page 469 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 B. User Box Admin. Setting • Setting is disabled if user authentication or account track is not performed. Functions • To set whether to allow or restrict the box administrator to use the system. •...
  • Page 470 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode D. Security Details (1) Password Rules Functions • To set whether to apply the password rules. • To apply the password rule to enhance security. • Passwords to be covered: CE password, administrator password, user box password, user password, account track password, passwords for con- fidential documents.
  • Page 471 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Functions • To set the function for prohibiting authentication operation in order to prevent the unauthorized access. • To use when setting the system to prohibit authentication failure when conducting authentication by password, etc.
  • Page 472 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Confidential Document Access Method Functions • To display the status of the authentication system on the control panel for the confi- dential document access. • It cannot be changed at the operator’s option since it will automatically be set accord- ing to the [Prohibit Functions When Auth.
  • Page 473 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (6) Audit Log Settings • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. • It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.42 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
  • Page 474 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (8) Hide Personal Information Functions • Selects whether to display file names and destinations in job logs. • Not to display file names and destinations that appears on job logs for security pro- tection purpose.
  • Page 475 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 E. Enhanced Security Mode • To set whether or not to enhance security. Setting/ • To use when enhancing the security function at user’s option. Procedure • The following settings are necessary for setting the security enhancement “ON”. Administrator Password : Change it with the one which meets password rules.
  • Page 476 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Name of the function Default setting When Enhanced Security Mode is ON Registering and Changing Allow Restrict (Cannot be changed) Addresses by user Public User Access Restrict Restrict (Cannot be changed) Print Data Capture Allowed Prohibited (Cannot be changed)
  • Page 477 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Overwrite Temporary Data • When the image becomes unnecessary, temporary data overwrite function will write meaningless data over all area where images are stored, and destroy the image data itself. The structure of image data will be destroyed so that in case HDD is stolen, the remain- ing data included in the image data will not leak.
  • Page 478 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Overwrite All Data Functions • To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting. • To initialize the area of use for the user stored in NVRAM. • To use when disposing of the hard disk. •...
  • Page 479 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (5) Format HDD Functions • To conduct logical formatting of HDD. • To initialize HDD. NOTE • It is subject to logical formatting here, therefore if starting with physical for- matting, follow as [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] →...
  • Page 480 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode G. Function Management Setting (1) Each Function Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that Vendor 2 or Management Device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions •...
  • Page 481 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (4) Authentication Time Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions •...
  • Page 482 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Image Log Transfer Settings • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. • It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.63 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.

  • Page 483: License Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8.6.11 License Settings • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 3 or later firmware is installed. A. Get Request Code Functions • To display and print a request code and serial number used to activate i-Option. •...

  • Page 484: My Panel Settings

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode My Panel Settings • This is displayed only when a registered user is logging in after user authentication. However, this is not displayed when both management device 2 and user authentication are used.

  • Page 485: Adjustment Item List

    9. Adjustment item list Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Adjustment item list Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Print Positioning: Leading Edge Printer ❍ Print Positioning: Side Edge Area Paper Feed Direction Adj. (3) (4) Image position: Leading Edge Image position: Side Edge Scan Area Cross Direction Adjustment...
  • Page 486 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 9. Adjustment item list • This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced. Prior- ity order, if applicable, during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the parentheses.

  • Page 487: 10. Service Mode

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.1 Service Mode function setting procedure NOTE • Ensure appropriate security for Service Mode function setting procedures. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service jobs.
  • Page 488 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode NOTE • Be sure to change the CE password from its default value. • For the procedure to change the CE password, see the Enhanced Security. See P.546 B. Exiting • Touch the [Exit] key. C.

  • Page 489: 10.2 Service Mode Function Tree

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.2 Service Mode function tree ✽ The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen. *1: Settings are available only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted. *2: It will be displayed only when the optional fax multi line (ML-501) is mounted.
  • Page 490 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Service Mode Ref. Page Imaging Process Gradation Adjust P.461 Adjustment Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias P.462 Auto Cleaning P.463 D Max Density P.463 TCR Level Setting P.464 Background Voltage Margin P.464 Transfer Output Fine Primary transfer adj.
  • Page 491 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Service Mode Ref. Page System 2 LCT Paper Size Setting P.498 Line Mag Setting P.499 Data Capture P.499 Split Line Detect. Setting P.501 Stamp P.502 Network Fax Settings P.503 Counter Life P.504 P.505 Service Call Counter...
  • Page 492 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Service Mode Ref. Page State Confirmation Memory/HDD Adj. Memory Check P.530 Compress / Decompression P.531 Check JPEG check P.531 Memory Bus Check P.531 Work Memory In/Out Check P.531 HDD Version Upgrade (LK) P.532 Down Ver.
  • Page 493 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Service Mode Ref. Page FAX *1 Line 1 *1 Modem/NCU *1 P.540 NetWork *1 System *1 Fax File Format *1 Communication *1 List Output *1 Function Parameter *1 Initialization *1 Line 2 *1 Modem/NCU *1 Network *1 Communication *1...
  • Page 494 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Service Mode Ref. Page Internet ISW Internet ISW Set P.542 HTTP Setting *5 P.542 FTP Setting *5 P.543 Forwarding Access Setting *5 P.544 Download *5 P.545...

  • Page 495: 10.3 Date/Time Input Mode

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.3 Date/Time Input mode • This mode is used to set time-of-day and date. 10.3.1 Date & Time Setting mode screen A00JF3E537DA A. Date & Time Setting mode setting procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.

  • Page 496: 10.4 Machine

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.4 Machine 10.4.1 Color Alignment Adjustment Functions • To adjust color shift if color shift is found at the trailing edge of either plain paper or thick paper by the comparison of originals and their output. •...

  • Page 497: Fusing Temperature

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.4.2 Fusing Temperature Functions • To adjust individually the temperature of the heating roller and the fusing pressure roller for each type of paper, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions.

  • Page 498: Fusing Transport Speed

    1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Fusing Transport Speed]. Procedure 3. Select the transport speed, at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred. <bizhub C650> Transport speed Paper Setting 310 mm/s...

  • Page 499: Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.4.4 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj. Functions • To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the original size sensor. • To display if the original size detection 2 Sensor is mounted. •...

  • Page 500: Printer Area

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.4.5 Printer Area A. Leading Edge Adjustment Functions • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in the manual bypass tray. (To adjust the timing where paper is sent out from the timing roller) •...
  • Page 501 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 B. Centering Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. • The PH Unit has been replaced. • A paper feed unit has been added. •...
  • Page 502 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode C. Leading Edge Adj. (Duplex Side 2) Functions • For individual types of paper, this function allows the adjustment of the image write start position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd side of duplex printing. •...
  • Page 503 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 D. Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction. Adjustment Width A •Width A on the test pattern produced should...
  • Page 504 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode E. Paper Feed Direction Adj. Functions • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. • Feed Direction Adjustment becomes necessary. • The print image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk). •...

  • Page 505: Scan Area

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.4.6 Scan Area • Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section. • If the color chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. • A: Image Position: Leading Edge COLOR CHART COLOR CHART •...
  • Page 506 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode B. Image Position: Side Edge Functions • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. •...
  • Page 507 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 C. Cross Direction Adjustment Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section. • The CCD unit has been replaced. Adjustment •Measure C width on the color chart and on Specification the sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
  • Page 508 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode D. Feed Direction Adjustment Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section. • The scanner assy has been replaced. • The scanner motor has been replaced. •...

  • Page 509: Printer Resist Loop

    To decrease the loop amount: Increase the setting value Instructions To increase the loop amount: Decrease the setting value Adjustment • The adjustable range is different depending on paper source and processing speed. Range <bizhub C650> Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4 LCT Manual Duplex ⎯...

  • Page 510: Color Registration Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.4.8 Color Registration Adjustment A. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow Functions • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. • To correct any color shift. •...

  • Page 511: Skew Adjustment

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.4.9 Skew adjustment A. Skew adjustment Functions • This function allows you to set the default position of the skew correction motor. • Adjusts and sets a value that is used as an individual skew correction motor's refer- ence position for skew correction control.
  • Page 512 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode B. LD lightness balance adjust. Functions • This function adjusts the LD lightness balance between the two LDs to correct the dif- ference of LD lightness between the LDs. • This setting is made after the PH unit or the service EEPROM board is replaced. •...

  • Page 513: Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.4.11 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment Functions • To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the manual bypass paper size unit of the manual bypass guide. • Use when the manual bypass paper size unit of the manual bypass guide has been changed.

  • Page 514: Split Line Prior Detection

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.4.14 Split Line Prior Detection Functions • To check the stain on the ADF original glass and display the result. • To manually perform the pre-detection of the stain which is normally conducted when the main/sub power switch is turned ON, recovering from the sleep/low power mode, etc.

  • Page 515: Transfer Belt

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Setting/ 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Image Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust]. Procedure 3. Touch [Stabilizer] and the Start key to perform image stabilization. NOTE •...

  • Page 516: D Max Density

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode B. Auto Cleaning Functions • To set whether to perform the long regular transfer belt cleaning operation (approx. 30 sec). • The long cleaning operation (approx. 30 seconds) can be used to take more effective measures against toner filming on the surface of the transfer belt.

  • Page 517: Tcr Level Setting

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.6.4 TCR Level Setting Functions • To adjust the T/C control level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a change in the amount of charge of toner and carrier due to an environmental change.

  • Page 518: Transfer Output Fine Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.6.6 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment A. Primary transfer adj. Functions • Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage. • To use when white spots appeared. Adjustment • The default setting is 0. Range -8 to +7 (step: 1) Adjustment...

  • Page 519: Stabilizer

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.6.7 Stabilizer A. Stabilization Only Functions • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. • Use if an image problem persists even after gradation adjustment has been exe- cuted.

  • Page 520: Paper Separation Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.6.9 Paper separation adjustment Functions • For duplex printing with the use of thin paper, the paper separation position is adjusted for the first and second sides of paper. • To ensure proper balance between paper separating and image transferring perfor- mances by varying the paper separation position applied for duplex printing of thin paper (64 g/ m ) in hot and humid conditions.

  • Page 521: Dev. Bias Choice

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.6.12 Dev. Bias Choice Functions • To change the setting of the developing bias voltage. • When this function is turned ON, it decreases the developing bias voltage, thereby preventing voltage leak from occurring. •...

  • Page 522: 10.7 Cs Remote Care

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.7 CS Remote Care 10.7.1 Outlines • CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone/fax line in order to control the machine. •...
  • Page 523 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Procedure Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line Using E-mail line modem modem *1 Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Remote Care function Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → Remote Care function Remote Care function Select [Service Mode]...
  • Page 524 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Procedure Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line Using E-mail line modem modem *1 Inputting the AT com- Proceed to step 12. Setting the E-mail address 1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], mand for initializing the modem and touch [Server Set].

  • Page 525: Software Sw Setting For Cs Remote Care

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.7.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care NOTE • SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident, be sure to restore the previous state. A.
  • Page 526 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode SW No. Functions Default SW 05 Modem redial interval 4 to 7 Reservation — — SW 06 Modem redial times Reservation — — SW 07 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1 to 7 Reserved —...
  • Page 527 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 SW No. Functions Default SW 12 Timer 2 Dial request completed → CONNECT reception SW 13 0 to 7 Reservation — — SW 14 Timer 4 Line connection → Start request telegram delivery SW 15 Timer 5...
  • Page 528 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode *1: Baud rate Mode 01-7 01-6 01-5 01-4 9600 bps 19200 bps “38400 bps” *2: Modem redial interval Mode 05-3 05-2 05-1 05-0 1 minute 2 minutes “3 minutes” 4 minutes 5 minutes 6 minutes 7 minutes...
  • Page 529 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 *5: Retransmission times on e-mail delivery error Mode 09-6 09-5 09-4 09-3 09-2 09-1 09-0 0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001 “10 times” 11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011 *6: Timer 1 (RING reception →...

  • Page 530: Setup Confirmation

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.7.4 Setup confirmation • Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch [CS Remote Care]. 3.

  • Page 531: Calling The Center From The Administrator

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.7.6 Calling the center from the administrator • When the CS Remote Care setup is complete, the administrator can call the CS Remote Care center. 1. Select [Administrator Settings], and touch [System Connection]. 2.
  • Page 532 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode C. Detail Setting (1) Basic Setting Functions • Execute the primary setting. • Use to change the set contents. • Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center. Setting/ 1.
  • Page 533 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Date & Time Setting Functions • To set the data and time-of-day. • Use to set or change the date and time-of-day. Setting/ 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Procedure 2.
  • Page 534 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode D. AT Command Functions • To set the command to be issued at the time of modem initialization. • This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting. •...
  • Page 535 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Receive <E-mail Address> Functions • To set the e-mail address used for the CS Remote Care. • To set the e-mail address. Setting/ • The default setting is No. Procedure •...
  • Page 536 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode <SMTP port number> Functions • To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the CS Remote Care. • To set the port number of the SMTP server. Setting/ • The default setting is 25. Procedure “25”...

  • Page 537: List Of The Cs Remote Care Error Code

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.7.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code A. When connecting by modem Error code Error Solution 0001 The line is busy (Busy detection) • Transmit again manually. 0002 Failure of the Modem default setting at transmit- •...
  • Page 538 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Error code Error Solution 001A Device ID inconsistency • Check device ID setting of the (Device ID of the host is not identical with the one main body side. of start request telegram.) •...
  • Page 539 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 B. When connecting by e-mails Error code Error Solution • Check the SMTP server on 0001 Connection timeout during transmission User side. Transmission error • Check the SMTP server on 0### ###: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal) User side.
  • Page 540 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Error code Error Solution • Check the POP3 server 3008 POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR environment on user’s side. • Check the POP3 server 3009 POP3_MAILBOX_FULL environment on user’s side. Not ready • Tried to transmit or receive an e-mail when the •...

  • Page 541: Troubleshooting For Cs Remote Care

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.7.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care If communication is not done properly, check the condition by following the procedures shown below. 1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting]. At this time, in the cases of initial transmitting / administrator transmitting / maintenance start transmitting / maintenance finish transmitting, the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen.

  • Page 542: System 1

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.8 System 1 10.8.1 Marketing Area Functions • To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according to the applicable marketing area. • Upon setup. Setting/ <Marketing Area> Procedure •...

  • Page 543: Serial Number

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.8.3 Serial Number Functions • To register the serial numbers of the machine and options. • The numbers will be printed on the list output. • To use the serial number as machine ID during CS Remote Care communication. •...

  • Page 544: Install Date

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.8.7 Install Date Functions • To register the date the main body was installed. • Upon setup. Setting/ 1. Call the Service Mode on the screen. Procedure 2. Select the key as follows. [System 1] →...

  • Page 545: Trouble Isolation

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 B. Self-Cleaning Functions • This setting allows you to select the self cleaning of the comb electrode section in the imaging unit /K. • This setting can be used to temporarily stop the self cleaning operation in order to address problems.

  • Page 546: Iu Life Setting

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.8.11 IU Life Setting • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. Functions • To set the life threshold for imaging units. • Use this setting when a gap appears between the actual life value of imaging unit and the life specification value due to the way * a machine is used.

  • Page 547: Change Warm Up Time *Bizhub C451 Only

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.8.13 Change Warm Up Time *bizhub C451 only • This function is only for Taiwan. Functions • To change the warm up time to be spent before the start of monochrome printing. •...

  • Page 548: System 2

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.9 System 2 10.9.1 Functions • Not used. Setting/ Procedure 10.9.2 Image Controller Setting Functions • To set the type of the controller. • [Peripheral Mode] appears when [Others] is selected. •...

  • Page 549: Option Board Status

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.9.3 Option Board Status Functions • To set when the optional fax mount kit, scan accelerator is mounted. • Use when setting up the optional fax mount kit, scan accelerator is mounted. Setting/ •...

  • Page 550: Software Switch Setting

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.9.6 Software Switch Setting Functions • To set the operating characteristic of each function from software switch depending on what types of printing are normally made. Setting/ 1. Touch [Software Switch Setting]. Procedure 2.

  • Page 551: Scan Caribration

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (3) Printing on paper of nonstandard size fed from the bypass tray (AnySize mode) • This function is available only when the function enhanced version 4 or later firmware is installed. Functions •...

  • Page 552: Line Mag Setting

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.9.10 Line Mag Setting Functions • To set whether to use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping. • To be used after replacing the CCD unit. After replacing the CCD unit, the default value needs to be set since the magnifica- tion offset value between the lines set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD).
  • Page 553 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Setting/ 5. Input the user name and the password. Procedure User name: capture Password: sysadm 4037F3E539DA 6. Using the “ls” command, display the list of the file available for capture. 4037F3E540DA 7.

  • Page 554: Split Line Detect. Setting

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Setting/ 8. Using the “get” command, transfer the data for capture to PC. Procedure 4037F3E542DA 9. Finish the command prompt. NOTE • After receiving capture data, select [Administrator Settings] → [Security Set- tings] →...

  • Page 555: Stamp

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 B. Warning Level Functions • To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected. • Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the lines.

  • Page 556: Network Fax Settings

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.9.14 Network Fax Settings Functions • To set whether or not to use network fax function. • To use network fax function (IP address fax, internet fax). • Selection will be available when each network fax function is set to “ON” in the follow- ing settings.

  • Page 557: 10.10 Counter

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.10 Counter • The counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the technical representative to check or set as necessary. 10.10.1 Procedure 1. Touch [Counter] to show the counter menu. 2.

  • Page 558: Jam

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Setting/ <3> Procedure • TCR new article detection (C) : Period of time over which the cyan toner cartridge has been used. • TCR new article detection (M) : Period of time over which the magenta toner car- tridge has been used.

  • Page 559: Maintenance

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.10.6 Maintenance Functions • To set a count value for maintenance of any given part. • When any given part is replaced. Setting/ Maint.-Set Procedure • Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-key pad. Maint.-Count •...

  • Page 560: 10.10.11 Paper Jam History

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.10.11 Paper Jam History Functions • To display the jam history in chronological order. • Use to check the jam history in chronological order. NOTE • [Code] displayed on the screen of JAM history indicates JAM code. For details of JAM code, see “Trouble shooting.”...

  • Page 561: Parts Counter (Fixed)

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.10.14 Parts Counter (Fixed) • It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-517/518 or FS-608) is mounted. Functions • When the optional finisher (FS-517/518 or FS-608), post inserter (PI-503) and/or Z folding unit (ZU-603) is mounted, the parts counter screen displays the relevant parts and their counts.
  • Page 562 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode CSRC Parts name Parts number Limit value Count condition param- eter PI sheet paper feed 13QN8201 1,000,000 1 count each time a sheet is fed clutch (Upper) from the PI upper tray. PI sending roller pair/ 50BA-574 200,000...

  • Page 563: 10.11 List Output

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.11 List Output 10.11.1 Machine Management List Functions • To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, total counter val- ues, and others. • At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. Setting/ •...

  • Page 564: 10.12 State Confirmation

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.12 State Confirmation 10.12.1 Sensor Check Functions • To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary. • Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs. Setting/ •...

  • Page 565: Sensor Check Screens

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.12.2 Sensor check screens • These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each indi- vidual machine. A. Sensor monitor (1) Sensor monitor 1,2 A00JF3E514DC...
  • Page 566 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (2) Sensor monitor 3,4 A00JF3E515DB...
  • Page 567 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (3) Sensor monitor 5,6 A00JF3E516DB...
  • Page 568 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (4) Sensor monitor 7,8 A00JF3E517DC...
  • Page 569 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (5) Sensor monitor 9,10 A00KF3E511DA...
  • Page 570 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (6) Sensor monitor 11,12 A00KF3E512DB...

  • Page 571: Sensor Check List

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.12.3 Sensor check list A. Sensor monitor (1) Sensor monitor 1 (Main body) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Out of device detection Tray 1 device detection sensor In position position Paper not...
  • Page 572 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Out of ⎯ ⎯ device detection In position position Paper not Paper PS24 paper empty Tray 4 paper empty sensor present present PS27 Near Empty Tray 4 near empty sensor...
  • Page 573 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Sensor monitor 2 (Main body, LCT) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Charging CL home PS43 Charging cleaner home sensor Blocked Unblocked sensor (this side) Charging CL home PS44 Charging cleaner return sensor Blocked...
  • Page 574 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (3) Sensor monitor 3 (FS-517/518/608) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name printer output detection See P.55 of the FS-517/518/608 service manual. FNS entrance passage detec- tion PS19 SUb-tray full detection PS12 paper exit detection PS16...
  • Page 575 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (4) Sensor monitor 4 (FS-517/518/608) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name PS20 stacker 0 piece detection See P.55 of the FS-517/518/608 service manual. FNS front door opening detec- tion F stapler head drive motor no needle...
  • Page 576 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (5) Sensor monitor 5 (FS-517/518/608, PK-512/513) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name BM center press passage detec- See P.55 of the FS-517/518/608 service manual. PS26 tion PS29 BM center press full detection BM center press drive malfunction motor trouble PK punch drive motor HP detec-...
  • Page 577 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (7) Sensor monitor 7 (PI-503) Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name PS202 Preset detection See P.19 of the PI-503 service manual. PS203 Set detection Tray upper limit PS204 detection Tray lower limit PS205...
  • Page 578 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (8) Sensor monitor 8 (ZU-603) Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Entrance detection L: See P.30 of the ZU-603 service manual. PSDTB Paper having Exit detection L: Paper having Detection 2 on edge side L: PSDTB Paper having...
  • Page 579 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (9) Sensor monitor 9 (FS-519) Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Carrying Paper Passage See P.54 of the FS-519/PK-510/OT-602 service manual. Middle Paper Passage Home1 (CD-Align) Home2 (CD-Align) Elevate Tray Raised/ Lowered Shutter...
  • Page 580 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (10) Sensor monitor 10 (SD-505, MT-502) Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name PS20 Saddle exit See P.26 of the SD-505 service manual. PS22 Folding R home Middle guide PS24 Saddle guide ⎯...
  • Page 581 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (11) Sensor monitor 11 (JS-504) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Exit (Non-sort 1) See P.16 of the JS-504 service manual. Exit (Non-sort 2) T1FDTB/ Full (Non-sort 1) T2FDTB/ Full (Non-sort 2) Front cover...

  • Page 582: Level History1

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.12.4 Table Number Functions • When IDC is detected, for plain paper, Thick 1/1+, Thick 2/3/4, and Black, the machine independently displays each Vg/Vdc output value that is calculated based on the density (toner amount stuck on the belt) of the test pattern created on the transfer belt.

  • Page 583: Temp. & Humidity

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.12.7 Temp. & Humidity Functions • To display the temperature and humidity of a specific location (IDC sensor portion) inside the machine and fusing temperature. • Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs. : 0 to 100 °C in 1 °C increments Setting/ •...
  • Page 584 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode B. Compress / Decompression Check Functions • To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly. • If the copy image is faulty. Adjustment 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.
  • Page 585 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 F. HDD Version Upgrade (LK) • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 3 or later firmware is installed. Functions • To maintain the compatibility of management information data and documents stored in HDD after the firmware upgrade.
  • Page 586 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode J. Conversion Up • For bizhub C550/C451, this is displayed only when the function enhanced version 1 or later firmware is installed. Functions • To convert and update management information data so that they become compati- ble with the enhanced version of firmware.
  • Page 587 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 M. Conversion Down • For bizhub C550/C451, this is displayed only when the function enhanced version 1 or later firmware is installed. Functions • To convert and update management information data so that they become compati- ble with the earlier version of firmware.

  • Page 588: Memory/Hdd State

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.12.10 Memory/HDD State Functions • To display the condition and amount of the memory and hard disk. • To display the mounting condition of the optional encryption board (security kit SC- 503).

  • Page 589: Test Mode

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.13 Test Mode • To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern. It also tests the printing operation in running mode, as well as the fax trans- mission.

  • Page 590: Halftone Pattern

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.13.3 Halftone Pattern Functions • To produce a solid halftone pattern. • Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise. Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density: 255 4036fs3043c0 Setting/ • # of Print (“1” to 999) Procedure •...

  • Page 591: Solid Pattern

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.13.5 Solid Pattern Functions • To produce each of the C, M, Y, and K solid patterns. • Used for checking reproducibility of image density. Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 4036fs3045c0 Setting/ •...

  • Page 592: Color Solid Pattern

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.13.7 8 Color Solid Pattern Functions • To produce an 8-color solid pattern. • Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color. Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 4036fs3047c0 Setting/ •...
  • Page 593 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.13.10 Fax Test • For details, see FK-502 Service Manual. 10.14 ADF See P.28 of the DF-611/610 service manual. 10.15 FAX • For details, see FK-502 Service Manual. 10.16 Finisher 10.16.1 CB-FN adjustment A.
  • Page 594 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Punch Resist Loop Size (Body) See P.14 of the PK-512/513 service manual. J. Punch Resist Loop Size (PI) See P.21 of the PI-503 service manual. K. 1st Z-Fold Position Adj. See P.34 of the ZU-603 service manual. L.

  • Page 595: Internet Isw Set

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10.17 Internet ISW • By using this setting, the firmware stored in the server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading. • For details for upgrading the firmware, refer to “Firmware upgrade” in the Maintenance section.

  • Page 596: Ftp Setting

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode D. Proxy Authentication Functions • To set the login name or password when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server. • To use when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server. Setting/ <Authentication>...

  • Page 597: Forwarding Access Setting

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 D. Connection Setting Functions • To set the port No. and the time for timeout when accessing the FTP server, and also to set whether or not to enable PASV mode. •...
  • Page 598 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.17.5 Download Functions • Access the program server according to the Internet ISW setting, and download the firmware. • To use when updating the firmware via network. Setting/ 1. Select [Download]. Procedure 2.

  • Page 599: Enhanced Security

    11. Enhanced Security Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 11. Enhanced Security 11.1 Enhanced Security function setting procedure 11.1.1 Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Press the following keys in this order. → → Stop Clear 3.

  • Page 600: Settings In The Enhanced Security

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 11. Enhanced Security 11.3 Settings in the Enhanced Security 11.3.1 CE Password Functions • To set and change the CE password. • Use to change the CE password. Setting/ • Enter the CE password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard. Procedure •...

  • Page 601: Administrator Feature Level

    11. Enhanced Security Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level Functions • To set which modes to be allowed for the administrator to use in Service Mode. • Use when allowing the administrator to use some modes in Service Mode. •...

  • Page 602: Nvram Data Backup

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 11. Enhanced Security 11.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup Functions • To backup NVRAM data in the main body to the flash memory. • To backup current data in order to prevent data in NVRAM from being erased unex- pectedly.
  • Page 603 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting 12.1 Billing Setting function setting procedure 12.1.1 Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Press the following keys in this order. → Stop 3. Billing Setting menu will appear. A00JF3E536DB 12.1.2 Exiting...

  • Page 604: Settings In The Billing Setting

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting 12.3 Settings in the Billing Setting 12.3.1 Counter Setting Functions • To set the counting method for the total counter, size counter and long length paper counter. (The long length paper counter is operational only on bizhub C451) •...
  • Page 605 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Setting/ Long Length Paper Counter Mode Procedure • When printing on the long paper (457.2 mm or over), the counting value will be the total of the value set by the total counter mode and the value by this setting. •...
  • Page 606 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting C. Authentication Device 2 Functions • To set whether or not the authentication device 2 is installed. • Set when the authentication unit (biometric type or card type) is mounted. Biometrics : Uses biometrics (finger vein) authentication system Card 1 : Uses IC card authentication system Card 2...
  • Page 607 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 5. Insert the compact flash card [1] into the slot. A00JF2C060DA 6. Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch. 7. Select [Yes] on the loadable device driver installation screen. A00JF3C543DA 8.
  • Page 608 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting D. Key Counter Only Functions • To set whether or not the key counter is installed. • Set when the key counter is mounted. • Select [Color Mode] and [Message] when the key counter is mounted. ✽...
  • Page 609 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 E. Management Device 1 Functions • To set whether or not the management device 1 is installed. • Set when the management device 1 is mounted. Setting/ NOTE • The setting is available only when user authentication is set “OFF” and Procedure account track is set “Off”...
  • Page 610 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting H. Vendor 2 Functions • To set whether or not the vendor 2 is installed. • Set when the vendor 2 is mounted. NOTE • When using the vendor along with the key counter, inserting the key counter will set it to the “Key Counter Mode”...
  • Page 611 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 NOTE • Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting values below. It needs resetting when cancelling the setting in order to set back to “not mounted”...

  • Page 612: Coverage Rate Clear

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting Authentication Authentication Management Management Setting Item Vendor 2 Device 1 Device 2 Device 1 Device 2 IPP Setting will be set to “OFF”, ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IPP Setting and Accept IPP job will be set to “OFF”.

  • Page 613: Procedure For Resetting

    13. Procedure for resetting Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 13. Procedure for resetting 13.1 Trouble resetting Functions • If the all troubles occur and the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and ON again, or opening and closing the front door, clear the status of the machine.

  • Page 614: Mechanical Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section 14.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner motor assy has been removed. •...
  • Page 615 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14.1.2 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner drive cables have been rewound 1. Move the mirror unit [1] to the center and push it against the notches [2] on the rail.
  • Page 616 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.1.3 Scanner position adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner drive cables have been rewound. • Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit must be completed. 1.
  • Page 617 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When replacing the original glass moving unit. 1. Set the height adjustment jig for the original glass moving unit [1].
  • Page 618 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 5. Remove four screws [1] from the original glass moving unit. A00JF3C013DA 6. Install four spacers [1] and make a height adjustment. A00JF3C014DA NOTE • Prepare and use the spacers described below as necessary. A00J 2903 ##: 0.5 mm thickness A00J 2908 ##: 0.2 mm thickness A00J 2909 ##: 0.1 mm thickness...
  • Page 619 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. Temporarily secure the original glass moving unit [2] with four screws [1]. 8. Check the height repeating step 1 to 9. Secure the original glass moving unit with four screws [1]. A00JF2C602DA 14.1.5 Adjusting the height of the guide support for the original glass moving unit...

  • Page 620: Mechanical Adjustment Of The Paper Feed Section

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.2 Mechanical adjustment of the paper feed section 14.2.1 Tray3/4 paper size change This adjustment must be made in the following case: • Upon user requests, the paper size used for the tray3/4 needs to be changed. 1.
  • Page 621 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Align the paper guide plate (rear) with the marking on the bottom and secure it with four screws. To set B5/8.5/16K sizes: • Insert the paper guide plate (rear) into the hole. Align it with the back marking and secure it.
  • Page 622 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 4. Remove the paper from the tray. 5. Secure the set of paper guides [1] on the tray using a screw (M3 x 8 mm: V121 0308 04). A00KF3C513DA 14.2.3 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2 This adjustment must be made in the following case: •...
  • Page 623 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Loosen two screws [1]. A00JF3C003DA 5. Move the paper guide [1] complete according to the amount of the mis- centering you checked in step 1 and adjust the center position of it. 6.
  • Page 624 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 4. Loosen ten screws [1]. A00JF3C006DA 5. Move the paper guide [1] complete according to the amount of the mis- centering you checked in step 1 and adjust the center position of it. 6.
  • Page 625 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. In the pick-up roller assy, put paper feed assist plate (A00J P001 ##) [2] on the paper feed assist plate holder [1], and fix them with two accompa- nying screws (M3 x 8 mm: V118 0308 03) [3].

  • Page 626: Mechanical Adjustment Of The Bypass Tray Section

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section 14.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The bypass paper size unit has been removed. 1.
  • Page 627 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Install the bypass unit cover so that part A (edge) [1] of the rack gear for the bypass paper size unit and part B [2] of the bypass unit cover are aligned in a straight line.

  • Page 628: Mechanical Adjustment Of The Main Drive Unit Section

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.4 Mechanical adjustment of the main drive unit section 14.4.1 PC drive gear positioning adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When the color PC drum motor was removed. See P.207 •...
  • Page 629 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Mount the color PC drum motor [1] while two hole positions are well set. A00JF2C455DA...

  • Page 630: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display Troubleshooting 15. Jam display 15.1 Misfeed display • When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper loca- tion are displayed on the control panel of the machine. 15.1.1 When the FS-517/518/608 is mounted A00JF4C501DB...
  • Page 631 15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Code *1 Jam type Misfeed processing location Action Display Misfeed at tray 3/4 hori- [10] 1709 Tray 3/4 horizontal transport unit P.592 zontal transport section 2nd image transfer [11] 3001 Upper right door P.593 section Tray 3/4 intermediate...
  • Page 632 Regarding jam at paper exit options, jam codes are available by selecting [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [JAM]. To identify misfeed locations, use the jam codes and refer to the above list. *2: bizhub C650/C550 only. 15.1.2 When the FS-519 is mounted...
  • Page 633 15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Code *1 Jam type Misfeed processing location Action Display Misfeed at vertical Manual bypass tray door, 2001 P.591 transport section Lower right door Misfeed at tray 3/4 hori- [10] 1709 Tray 3/4 horizontal transport unit P.592 zontal transport section 2nd image transfer...

  • Page 634: When The Zu-603 Is Mounted

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.1.3 When the ZU-603 is mounted A00HF4C501DA Display Code *1 Jam type Misfeed processing location Action 7238 7239 7240 7241 7242 7244 7245 See P.45 of the ZU-603 service manual. 7246 7247 7260 7261...
  • Page 635 15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15.1.4 When the JS-504 is mounted A00JF4C520DA Display Code *1 Jam type Misfeed processing location Action 7216 See P.19 of the JS-504 service manual. *1: JAM code is displayed at [Paper Jam History] under [Counter] available from Service Mode.

  • Page 636: Sensor Layout

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.2 Sensor layout [10] A00JF4C502DA Paper exit sensor PS39 Tray 2 vertical transport sensor PS12 ADU paper passage sensor/1 PS47 Intermediate roller sensor PS28 [3]*1 Timing roller sensor PS38 Tray 4 paper feed sensor PS26 [3]*1 OHP detection sensor PS40...
  • Page 637 15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15.3 Solution 15.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper.

  • Page 638: Misfeed At Tray 1 Feed Section

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.2 Misfeed at tray 1 feed section A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the tray1 vertical transport misfeed at tray 1 sensor (PS4) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray1 starts feed section to feed paper.

  • Page 639: Misfeed At Tray 2 Feed Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.3 Misfeed at tray 2 feed section A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the tray2 vertical transport misfeed at tray 2 sensor (PS12) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray2 feed section starts to feed paper.

  • Page 640: Misfeed At Tray 3 Feed Section

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.4 Misfeed at tray 3 feed section A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of • The leading edge of the paper does not block the tray3 paper feed sensor misfeed at tray 3 (PS21) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 3 starts to feed section feed paper.

  • Page 641: Misfeed At Tray 4 Feed Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.5 Misfeed at tray 4 feed section A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of • The leading edge of the paper does not unblock the tray4 paper feed sensor misfeed at tray 4 (PS26) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 4 starts to feed section feed paper.

  • Page 642: Misfeed At Manual Bypass Feed Section

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.6 Misfeed at manual bypass feed section A. Detection timing Type Description • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the manual bypass starts to feed paper.

  • Page 643: Misfeed At Duplex Pre-Registration Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.7 Misfeed at duplex pre-registration section A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given misfeed at duplex period of time after a duplex paper feed sequence has been started.

  • Page 644: Misfeed At Vertical Transport Section

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.8 Misfeed at vertical transport section A. Detection timing Type Description • The tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) is not turned ON even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has turned ON the tray2 vertical trans- port sensor (PS12).

  • Page 645: Misfeed At Tray 3/4 Horizontal Transport Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.9 Misfeed at tray 3/4 horizontal transport section A. Detection timing Type Description • The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the horizontal transport sensor (PS29).

  • Page 646: Misfeed At 2Nd Image Transfer Section

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.10 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section A. Detection timing Type Description • A sheet of paper does not turn OFF the OHP detection sensor (PS40) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet turns ON the PS40. Detection of misfeed at 2nd •...

  • Page 647: Misfeed At Tray 3/4 Intermediate Transport Roller Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.11 Misfeed at tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section A. Detection timing Type Description • A sheet of paper does not turn ON the tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet turns ON the intermediate roller sensor (PS28).

  • Page 648: Misfeed At Exit Section

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.12 Misfeed at exit section A. Detection timing Type Description • The exhaust sensor (PC39) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period Detection of of time after the paper has unblocked PC39. misfeed at exit •...

  • Page 649: Misfeed At Duplex Transport Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.13 Misfeed at duplex transport section A. Detection timing Type Description • A sheet of paper does not unblock the ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet blocks the Detection of ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47).
  • Page 650 15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.14 Controller jam A. Detection timing Type Description • A control erratic operation as it relates to the duplex unit occurs. Controller jam • A stop command (a command to effect a forced stop) is received. •...

  • Page 652: Malfunction Code

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16. Malfunction code 16.1 Alert code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding warning code and maintenance call mark on the control panel. •...

  • Page 653: Alert Code List

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.1.1 Alert code list • If an image stabilization or scanner fault occurs, the corresponding warning code appears. Code Item Description CCD gain adjustment failure • It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment value is faulty.
  • Page 654 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Code Item Description P-18 PC charge cleaning trouble 1 • Charging cleaner return sensor is not interrupted even after the specified time has passed when the wire cleaning material is moving forward. * Under the situation above occurs, control will be switched to the return operation after the warning is given.

  • Page 655: S-1: Ccd Gain Adjustment Failure

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.2 Solution 16.2.1 S-1: CCD gain adjustment failure Relevant parts Scanner assy CCD sensor unit Image processing board (IPB) Step Action Correct the harness connection between CCDB and IPB if faulty. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary.

  • Page 656: P-28 Idc Sensor (Rear) Failure

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.2.4 P-5: IDC sensor (front) failure 16.2.5 P-28 IDC sensor (rear) failure Relevant parts IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) Printer control board (PRCB) IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) High voltage unit/1 (HV1) Transfer belt unit Step Action Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty.
  • Page 657 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.2.10 P-14: Skew correction trouble Relevant parts IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) PH relay board (REYB/PH) IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) Printer control board (PRCB) PH unit Imaging unit Step Action Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary. Clean the contact of the imaging unit connector if dirty.

  • Page 658: P-21: Color Regist Test Pattern Failure

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.2.13 P-21: Color regist test pattern failure Relevant parts Transfer belt unit Printer control board (PRCB) PH unit Step Action Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty. Change the image transfer belt unit if the transfer belt is damaged.
  • Page 659 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.2.16 P-31: PC home sensor (K) malfunction Relevant parts K PC encoder sensor/1 (PC45) Transport drive assy K PC encoder sensor/2 (PC46) Printer control board (PRCB) Step Action Perform the faulty sensor check procedure. *1 Check the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, for installed position and proper connector connection.

  • Page 660: Trouble Code

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.3 Trouble code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the control panel. A00JF4E512DA 16.3.1 Trouble code list * For the details of the malfunction codes of the options, see the Service Manual for the cor- responding option.
  • Page 661 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C0216 LCT up/down abnormality See P.42 of the LU-301 service manual. C0301 Suction fan motor’s fail- • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- ⎯...
  • Page 662 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C1124 Sheet feeder up/down See P.31 of the PI-503 service manual. drive (lower) C1125 Sheet feeder up/down Post drive (upper) Inserter C1126 Sheet feeder transporta- tion drive...
  • Page 663 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C11B0 Finishing option stapler See P.73 of the FS-519/PK-510/OT-602 ser- ⎯ vice manual. unit CD drive failure C11B1 Undetectable C11B2 Finishing option stapling See P.73 of the FS-519/PK-510/OT-602 ser- ⎯...
  • Page 664 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C2152 Transfer belt pressure • At the completion of transfer belt pressure/ welding alienation retraction operations, the pressure welding alienation sensor/K or the pressure welding alienation sensor/color is not in the status corresponding to each of the transfer belt pressure/retraction operations.
  • Page 665 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C2254 Color PC drum motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a ⎯ turning at abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.
  • Page 666 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C2552 Abnormally high toner • TC ratio in the developing unit which is density detected cyan determined by Toner replenishing amount ⎯...
  • Page 667 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C2651 EEPROM access error • The re-written data, which has been read ⎯ (IU C) out, checked and founded as error, is read out again and found as error.
  • Page 668 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C3305 Fusing cooling fan motor/ • The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for ⎯ 3 failure to turn a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.
  • Page 669 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C3824 Fusing abnormally low • The soaking roller thermistor/1 continues to temperature detection detect a temperature lower than a predeter- ⎯...
  • Page 670 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C4501 Laser malfunction • SOS signal is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time after staring the laser output.
  • Page 671 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C6102 Drive system home • The scanner home sensor is unable to sensor malfunction detect the scanner located at its home posi- tion.
  • Page 672 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C8105 Undetectable ⎯ C8302 Read cooling fan trouble See P.62 of the DF-611/610 service manual. C9401 Exposure turning on the •...
  • Page 673 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CB116 FAX driver error: FAX See the FK-502 Service Manual. board nonresponse ⎯ (Nonresponse after initial- ization) CB117 FAX driver error: ACK ⎯...
  • Page 674 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CB137 MIF driver error: DPRAM See the FK-502 Service Manual. ⎯ RESET reception ⎯ CB140 MSG I/F Error with JC CB141 I/F error with main: I/F ⎯...
  • Page 675 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CB166 1 destination control: See the FK-502 Service Manual. ⎯ Reception resource check error CB167 1 destination control: ⎯ Deployment error of send- ing image information CB168 1 destination control: ⎯...
  • Page 676 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CC151 ROM contents error upon • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM ⎯ startup (MSC) contents check of the MSC (PRCB) during starting CC152 ROM contents error upon •...
  • Page 677 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CD004 Hard disk access error • Unable to communicate between the hard ⎯ disk and printer control board (PRCB). ⎯ CD005 Hard disk error 1 •...
  • Page 678 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CD251 No JPEG board mounting • JPEG board (Scan accelerator kit) is not ⎯ at JPEG board mount mounted when the JPEG board mounting is setting set ON at Service Mode.
  • Page 679 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 • The machine displays an abort code (CF###) on the control panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software control. • When the system program is aborted, check the electrical component, unit, option, and connection relating to the specific type of the abort condition.
  • Page 680 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CF131 Image transfer mal- • MFP board (MFPB) Print TIME OUT functions CF201 startIRReadAnd An exceptional Compress()Sequence instance occurred due to the unex- CF202 startWorkSave()Sequence pected parameter in abnormal...
  • Page 681 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CF520 Framing error Communication error • MFP board (MFPB) (IR detected) CF530 Parity error + Framing error CF540 Overrun error CF550 Parity error + Overrun error CF560 Overrun error + Framing error CF570 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error...
  • Page 682 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CF802 SIO sending port...ENG • MFP board (MFPB)/ Engine CF806 SIO sending port...IRC • MFP board (MFPB) CF807 SIO sending port...ADF CF812 SIO sending port...Fiery •...
  • Page 683 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFB00 ASIC117 first sheet DMA00 • MFP board (MFPB) CFB01 ASIC117 first sheet DMA01 CFB02 ASIC117 first sheet DMA02 CFB03 ASIC117 first sheet DMA03 CFB04 ASIC117 first sheet DMA04 •...
  • Page 684 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFB34 ASIC117 second sheet DMA20 • External controller I/F board CFB35 ASIC117 second sheet DMA21 CFB36 ASIC117 second sheet DMA22 CFB37 ASIC117 second sheet DMA23 CFB38 ASIC117 second sheet DMA24 CFB39 ASIC117 second sheet DMA25 CFB3A ASIC117 second sheet DMA26...
  • Page 685 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFC11 ASIC117 first sheet DMA17 error interruption • MFP board (MFPB) CFC12 ASIC117 first sheet DMA18 error interruption CFC13 ASIC117 first sheet DMA19 error interruption CFC14 ASIC117 first sheet DMA20 error interruption CFC15 ASIC117 first sheet DMA21 error interruption CFC16 ASIC117 first sheet DMA22 error interruption...
  • Page 686 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFC54 ASIC117 second sheet DMA04 error interruption • External controller I/F board CFC55 ASIC117 second sheet DMA05 error interruption CFC56 ASIC117 second sheet DMA06 error interruption CFC57 ASIC117 second sheet DMA07 error interruption CFC58 ASIC117 second sheet DMA08 error interruption CFC59 ASIC117 second sheet DMA09 error interruption...
  • Page 687 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFC7D ASIC117 second sheet master read data parity error • External controller I/F board CFC7E ASIC117 second sheet master write data parity error CFC7F ASIC117 second sheet system error CFC80 ASIC117 second sheet sleep read data parity error CFC81 ASIC117 second sheet sleep write data parity error...
  • Page 688 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFCB7 ASIC7 master write data parity error • JPEG board CFCB8 ASIC7 system error CFCB9 ASIC7 sleep read data parity error CFCBA ASIC7 sleep write data parity error CFCBB ASIC7 address parity error CFCD0 CPS2300Great watchdog timer error •...
  • Page 689 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFD50 ASIC117 second sheet DMA00 time out • External controller I/F board CFD51 ASIC117 second sheet DMA01 time out CFD52 ASIC117 second sheet DMA02 time out CFD53 ASIC117 second sheet DMA03 time out CFD54 ASIC117 second sheet DMA04 time out CFD55 ASIC117 second sheet DMA05 time out...
  • Page 690 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFE11 ASIC117 first sheet DMA17 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFE12 ASIC117 first sheet DMA18 time out CFE13 ASIC117 first sheet DMA19 time out CFE14 ASIC117 first sheet DMA20 time out CFE15 ASIC117 first sheet DMA21 time out CFE16 ASIC117 first sheet DMA22 time out...
  • Page 691 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFEA1 ASIC7 DMA_C time out • JPEG board CFEA2 ASIC7 DMA_D time out CFF00 ASIC117 first sheet DMA00 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFF01 ASIC117 first sheet DMA01 time out CFF02 ASIC117 first sheet DMA02 time out CFF03 ASIC117 first sheet DMA03 time out...

  • Page 692: How To Reset

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFF62 ASIC117 second sheet DMA18 time out • External controller I/F board CFF63 ASIC117 second sheet DMA19 time out CFF64 ASIC117 second sheet DMA20 time out CFF65 ASIC117 second sheet DMA21 time out CFF66 ASIC117 second sheet DMA22 time out CFF67 ASIC117 second sheet DMA23 time out...

  • Page 693: C0104: Tray 3/4 Feeder Transportation Motor Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5 Solution 16.5.1 C0104: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor failure to turn 16.5.2 C0105: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Transport motor (M25) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step...

  • Page 694: C0204: Tray 2 Feeder Up/Down Abnormality

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.4 C0204: Tray 2 feeder up/down abnormality Relevant parts Tray 2 upper limit sensor (PS14) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Tray 2 lift-up motor (M8) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...

  • Page 695: C0208: Tray 4 Feeder Up/Down Abnormality

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.6 C0208: Tray 4 feeder up/down abnormality Relevant parts Tray 4 upper limit sensor (PS27) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Tray 4 lift-up motor (M24) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...

  • Page 696: C0301: Suction Fan Motor's Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.8 C0301: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Suction fan motor (FM1) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM1 connector for proper con- —...

  • Page 697: C2101: Pc Charge Cleaning Malfunction

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.10 C2101: PC charge cleaning malfunction Relevant parts Imaging unit /K Printer control board (PRCB) Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43) Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44) Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...

  • Page 698: C2152: Transfer Belt Pressure Welding Alienation

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.12 C2152: Transfer belt pressure welding alienation Relevant parts Pressure welding alienation sensor/K (PS51) Printer control board (PRCB) Pressure welding alienation sensor/color (PS52) 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...

  • Page 699: C2204: Waste Toner Agitating Motor's Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.18 C2204: Waste toner agitating motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor (PS23) Printer control board (PRCB) Waste toner agitating motor (M20) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component)

  • Page 700: C2255: Color Developing Motor's Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.21 C2255: Color developing motor’s failure to turn 16.5.22 C2256: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Color developing motor (M17) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component)

  • Page 701: C2259: K Developing Motor's Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.25 C2259: K developing motor’s failure to turn 16.5.26 C225A: K developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts K developing motor (M19) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component)

  • Page 702: C2352: Color Toner Suction Fan Motor's Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.29 C2351: K toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts K toner suction fan motor (FM8) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM8 connector for proper con- —...

  • Page 703: C2354: Rear Side Cooling Fan Motor's Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.31 C2353: IU cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts IU cooling fan motor (FM15) PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM15 connector for proper —...

  • Page 704: C2451: Release New Transfer Belt Unit

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.33 C2451: Release new transfer belt unit Relevant parts Transfer belt unit Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Reinstall unit — — Check there is a short circuit in the fuse of the transfer belt unit.

  • Page 705: C2552: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Cyan Tcr Sensor

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.37 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor 16.5.38 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor 16.5.39 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Sub hopper unit Imaging unit /M...

  • Page 706: C2558: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Black Tcr Sensor

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.41 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor Relevant parts Imaging unit /K Sub hopper unit Toner cartridge /K Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Correct the TCR connection on the...

  • Page 707: C255C: Black Tcr Sensor Adjustment Failure

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.45 C255C: Black TCR sensor adjustment failure Relevant parts Imaging unit /K Printer control board (PRCB) Toner supply motor/K (M12) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Clean or correct each contact of the —...

  • Page 708: C2650: Main Backup Media Access Error

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.46 C2650: Main backup media access error Relevant parts Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the connector (CN23PRCB) on PRCB, the connector (CN1SV ERB) on SV ERB, and the harness between the boards —...
  • Page 709 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.47 C2651: EEPROM access error (IU C) 16.5.48 C2652: EEPROM access error (IU M) 16.5.49 C2653: EEPROM access error (IU Y) 16.5.50 C2654: EEPROM access error (IU K) Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Printer control board (PRCB) Imaging unit /M Imaging unit /Y...

  • Page 710: C3101: Fusing Roller Separation Failure

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.55 C3101: Fusing roller separation failure Relevant parts Roller pressure welding alienation sensor (PS55) Printer control board (PRCB) Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) Fusing unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M29 connector for proper...

  • Page 711: C3201: Fusing Motor Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.57 C3201: Fusing motor failure to turn 16.5.58 C3202: Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Fusing motor (M30) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M30 connector for proper —...

  • Page 712: C3304: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/ 2 Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.60 C3304: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 2 failure to turn Relevant parts Fusing cooling fan motor/2 (FM4) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM4 connector for proper —...

  • Page 713: C3423: Fusing Heaters Trouble (Pressurizing Side)

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.62 C3423: Fusing heaters trouble (pressurizing side) 16.5.63 C3424: Fusing heaters trouble (soaking side) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...
  • Page 714 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.65 C3461: Release new fusing unit Relevant parts Fusing unit Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the fusing unit for correct installation —...

  • Page 715: C3723: Fusing Abnormally High Temperature Detection (Pressurizing Side)

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.69 C3723: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (pressurizing side) 16.5.70 C3724: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (soaking side) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action...
  • Page 716 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.73 C3823: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (pressurizing side) 16.5.74 C3824: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (soaking side) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action...

  • Page 717: C3923: Fusing Sensor Wire Breaks Detection (Pressurizing Side)

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.78 C3923: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (pressurizing side) 16.5.79 C3924: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (soaking side) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action...

  • Page 718: C4101: Polygon Motor Rotation Trouble

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.83 C4101: Polygon motor rotation trouble Relevant parts PH unit PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the connector for proper connection —...

  • Page 719: C4501: Laser Malfunction

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.85 C4501: Laser malfunction Relevant parts PH unit PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the connector for proper connection —...

  • Page 720: C5304: Ih Cooling Fan Motor/1'S Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.88 C5304: IH cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn Relevant parts IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM10 connector for proper —...

  • Page 721: C5306: Ih Cooling Fan Motor/3'S Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.90 C5306: IH cooling fan motor/3’s failure to turn Relevant parts IH cooling fan motor/3 (FM12) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM12 connector for proper —...

  • Page 722: C5354: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor's Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.92 C5354: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM6 connector for proper —...

  • Page 723: C5370: Mfp Control Board Cooling Fan Motor's Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.94 C5370: MFP control board cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts MFP control board cooling fan motor (FM17) Slide Interface board (REYB/SL) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component)

  • Page 724: C6102: Drive System Home Sensor Malfunction

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.96 C6102: Drive system home sensor malfunction 16.5.97 C6103: Slider over running Relevant parts Scanner home sensor (PS201) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) Scanner motor (M201) Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...

  • Page 725: C6704: Image Input Time Out

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.99 C6704: Image input time out Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirma- tion] →...

  • Page 726: C6F01: Scanner Sequence Trouble

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.101 C6F01: Scanner sequence trouble 1 Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) DF control board (DFCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Correct the harness connection between — —...
  • Page 727 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.104 CA051: Standard controller configuration failure 16.5.105 CA052: Controller hardware error 16.5.106 CA053: Controller start failure Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check to see if the following setting has been correctly made: [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 728 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.111 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT) Relevant parts Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Rewrite the firmware. — —...
  • Page 729 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.112 CC164: ROM contents error (MSC) Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the ROM version. — — Rewrite the firmware.
  • Page 730 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.123 CD002: JOB RAM save error Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the hard disk connector for proper — —...
  • Page 731 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.137 CD010: Hard disk unformat Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirma- tion] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [HDD For- —...
  • Page 732 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.142 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure 16.5.143 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Change MFPB. — — 16.5.144 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) FAX board...
  • Page 733 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.147 CD251: No JPEG board mounting at JPEG board mount setting Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) JPEG board (SA-501) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the JPEG board connector for proper connection and correct as neces- —...
  • Page 734 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.150 CD271: i-Option activated and additional memory not installed Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Memory for i-Option WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the memory for proper connection —...
  • Page 735 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.151 CD401: NACK command incorrect 16.5.152 CD402: ACK command incorrect 16.5.153 CD403: Checksum error 16.5.154 CD404: Receiving packet incorrect 16.5.155 CD405: Receiving packet analysis error 16.5.156 CD406: ACK receiving timeout 16.5.157 CD407: Retransmission timeout Relevant parts MFP board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM...
  • Page 736 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.164 CD3##: NVRAM data error • When the data stored due to the NVRAM trouble is lost, backup data can be used for res- toration. • Trouble code [C-D370] will be displayed when multiple errors (over 5) of NVRAM data are detected, which can be restored with one restoration command.
  • Page 737 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.165 CE002: Message and method parameter failure Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) If it occurred after upgrading the firmware, conduct the following setting.
  • Page 738 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.168 CEEE3: Printer control board malfunction Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the PRCB connector for proper — — connection and correct as necessary. Change PRCB —...

  • Page 739: Power Supply Trouble

    Result Action (Location) Check that the fusing unit is securely — Reconnect. plugged in. (Only for bizhub C650) Is a power voltage supplied across Check the WIRING from K-20 PJ1DCPU-1 and 2 on DCPU? the wall outlet to SW1 PJ1.

  • Page 740: Fusing Heaters Do Not Operate

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 17. Power supply trouble 17.3 Fusing heaters do not operate Relevant parts Right door switch (MS1) DC power supply (DCPU) Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) Relay drive board (REDB) WIRING Step Check item DIAGRAM Result Action...
  • Page 741 17. Power supply trouble Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 17.5.2 Finisher A. FS-517/518/608 WIRING Step Check item DIAGRAM Result Action (Location) Are DC24 V being applied to CN85? L-23 Malfunction in finisher. Are DC24 V being applied to PJ6-3 on Check wiring from DCPU J to K-23 DCPU?

  • Page 742: Image Quality Problem

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18. Image quality problem 18.1 How to read element date • As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for “State Confirmation” available from “Service Mode” can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem. A00JF4E513DA...
  • Page 743 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.1.1 Table number A00JF4E514DA Vdc-C • Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced. Vdc-M • Standard values: around 400 V Vdc-Y • A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater. Vdc-K •...
  • Page 744 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.1.2 Level history 1 A00JF4E515DA TCR-C • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments). TCR-M • Standard value: 6 to 8 % TCR-Y • Relevant components: TCR sensor TCR-K IDC1 •...
  • Page 745 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.1.3 Level history 2 A00JF4E516DA IDC Sensor Adjust 1 • Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value. IDC Sensor Adjust 2 • It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255. •...

  • Page 746: How To Identify Problematic Part

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.2 How to identify problematic part • This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial check items” and “Troubleshooting proce- dure by a particular image quality problem.” • When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the “Initial check items” and, if the cause is yet to be identified, go to “Troubleshooting procedure by a particular image quality problem.”...
  • Page 747 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 C. Initial check items 3 • If the printer is responsible for the image problem, let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors 4 colors Mono color A00JF4C510DA...
  • Page 748 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3 Solution NOTE • Typical faulty image samples shown in the following are all printed with A4S set- ting. 18.3.1 Scanner system: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan direction, colored lines in sub scan direction, and colored bands in sub scan direction A.
  • Page 749 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 (2) When the ADF is used Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. Change original. ADF reading section Glass is dirty. Clean. ADF scanning guide ADF scanning guide is damaged Clean.

  • Page 750: Scanner System: White Lines In Main Scan Direction, White Bands In Main

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.2 Scanner system: white lines in main scan direction, white bands in main scan direction, colored lines in main scan direction, and colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines in main White bands in main Color lines in main...
  • Page 751 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.3 Scanner system: color spots A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4029c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original. Original pad is dirty. YES Clean.
  • Page 752 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.4 Scanner system: fog A. Typical faulty images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 4036fs4030c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original. Original pad is dirty.

  • Page 753: Scanner System: Blurred Image, Blotchy Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.5 Scanner system: blurred image, blotchy image A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4031c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original. ADF does not lie flat.
  • Page 754 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.6 Scanner system: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in main scan direction) A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4032c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original.

  • Page 755: Scanner System: Moire

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.7 Scanner system: moire A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4033c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Moire distortions recur even after Change the original mode the orientation of original has been (select one other than that changed.

  • Page 756: Scanner System: Skewed Image

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.8 Scanner system: skewed image A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4034c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is skew. YES Reposition original. Original glass Original glass is in positive contact Reinstall the glass.
  • Page 757 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.9 Scanner system: distorted image A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4035c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Installation Machine is installed on a level sur- Reinstall.
  • Page 758 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.10 Scanner system: low image density, rough image A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original glass Original Glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth.
  • Page 759 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.11 Scanner system: defective ACS A. Typical faulty images Colored area of original ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Black-and-white area of original ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4037c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Auto Color Level...

  • Page 760: Scanner System: Blank Copy, Black Copy

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.12 Scanner system: blank copy, black copy A. Typical faulty images Blank copy Black copy 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Reconnect.

  • Page 761: Scanner System: Abnormal Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.13 Scanner system: abnormal image A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE Data on previous page ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Data on current page ABCDE 4036fs4040c0 4036fs4042c0 4036fs4041c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item...

  • Page 762: Scanner System: Uneven Density

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.14 Scanner system: uneven density A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 4036fs4045c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure (1) When the original glass is used Step Section Check item Result Action 2nd/3rd mirrors Scanner assy is not properly YES Perform “Focus positioning of the carriage...
  • Page 763 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.15 Printer monocolor: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan direction, colored lines colored bands in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images White bands in sub Colored lines in sub Colored bands in sub White lines in sub...

  • Page 764: Printer Monocolor: White Lines In Main Scan Direction, White Bands In Main

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.16 Printer monocolor: white lines in main scan direction, white bands in main scan direction, colored lines in main scan direction, colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images Colored bands in main White bands in main Colored lines in main...

  • Page 765: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density In Sub Scan Direction

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.17 Printer monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 4036fs4045c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action High image Uneven density in sub scan direc- YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of density original tion occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to...

  • Page 766: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density In Main Scan Direction

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.18 Printer monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Machine The problem has been eliminated Go to next step.

  • Page 767: Printer Monocolor: Low Image Density

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.19 Printer monocolor: low image density A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.
  • Page 768 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem Step Section Check item Result Action Image Process Toner is properly supplied when Go to next step. Adjustment → TCR toner supply is run. TCR Toner Supply (Service Mode) Image Process “Conv.

  • Page 769: Printer Monocolor: Gradation Reproduction Failure

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.20 Printer monocolor: gradation reproduction failure A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4048c0 4036fs4049c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.

  • Page 770: Printer Monocolor: Foggy Background

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.21 Printer monocolor: foggy background A. Typical faulty images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 4036fs4030c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.
  • Page 771 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Step Section Check item Result Action Image Process “Conv. Value” falls within the YES Go to step 17. Adjustment specified range as checked through →Gradation gradation adjust. Adjust Dark: 0 ± 100 (Service Mode) Highlight: 0 ±...

  • Page 772: Printer Monocolor: Void Areas, White Spots

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.22 Printer monocolor: void areas, white spots A. Typical faulty images Void areas White spots 4036fs4051c0 4036fs4050c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Image Check There are void areas at the front See P.712 side or high density section.
  • Page 773 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.23 Printer monocolor: colored spots A. Typical faulty images Colored spots 4036fs4052c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Imaging unit Developing bias contact terminal Clean contact terminal and makes good connection.

  • Page 774: Printer Monocolor: Blurred Image

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.24 Printer monocolor: blurred image A. Typical faulty images Blurred image 4036fs4031c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action PH unit The surface of the PH window is YES Clean with cleaning jig.

  • Page 775: Printer Monocolor: Blank Copy, Black Copy

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.25 Printer monocolor: blank copy, black copy A. Typical faulty images Blank copy Black copy 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Image check A blank copy occurs. YES Check PH unit connector for proper connection.

  • Page 776: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Image

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.26 Printer monocolor: uneven image A. Typical faulty images 4138fs4507c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color Re-install it. is surely installed. PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.

  • Page 777: Printer 4-Color: White Lines In Sub Scan Direction, White Bands In Sub Scan

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.27 Printer 4-color: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan direction, colored lines in sub scan direction, and colored bands in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines in sub White bands in sub Colored lines in sub...
  • Page 778 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.28 Printer 4-color: white lines in main scan direction, white bands in main scan direction, colored lines in main scan direction, and colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines in main White bands in Colored lines in main...

  • Page 779: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density In Sub Scan Direction

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.29 Printer 4-color: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent.

  • Page 780: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density In Main Scan Direction

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.30 Printer 4-color: uneven density in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent.

  • Page 781: Printer 4-Color: Low Image Density

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.31 Printer 4-color: low image density A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.

  • Page 782: Printer 4-Color: Poor Color Reproduction

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.32 Printer 4-color: poor color reproduction A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4058c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.

  • Page 783: Printer 4-Color: Incorrect Color Image Registration

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.33 Printer 4-color: incorrect color image registration A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4032c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.

  • Page 784: Printer 4-Color: Void Areas, White Spots

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.34 Printer 4-color: void areas, white spots A. Typical faulty images Void areas White spots 4036fs4051c0 4036fs4050c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Image check There are void areas at the front See P.727 side or high density section.

  • Page 785: Printer 4-Color: Colored Spots

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.35 Printer 4-color: colored spots A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4052c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is YES Change imaging unit. scratched.
  • Page 786 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.36 Printer 4-color: poor fusing performance, offset A. Typical faulty images Poor fusing performance Offset 4036fs4059c0 4036fs4060c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper type does not match. YES Change the setting.

  • Page 787: Printer 4-Color: Brush Effect, Blurred Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.37 Printer 4-color: brush effect, blurred image A. Typical faulty images Brush effect Blurred image 4036fs4061c0 4036fs4031c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.

  • Page 788: Printer 4-Color: Back Marking

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.38 Printer 4-color: back marking A. Typical faulty images 4036fs4062c0 4036fs4063c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action 2nd image trans- Image transfer roller is scratched or YES Change transfer roller unit. fer roller unit dirty.

  • Page 789: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.39 Printer 4-color: uneven image A. Typical faulty images 4138fs4507c0 B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color Re-install it. is surely installed. PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.

  • Page 790: Parts Layout Drawing

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing Appendix 19. Parts layout drawing 19.1 Main body 19.1.1 IR section [16] [15 ] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A00JF5E501DA Scanner motor (M201) Exposure lamp (FL201) 20 degree sensor (PS202) [10] Inverter board (INVB) Original size detection 1 sensor (PS204) [11] Original glass moving motor (M202)

  • Page 791: Engine Section

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19.1.2 Engine section [20] [18] [19] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A00JF5C503DA Cooling fan motor (FM3) [11] Paper feed transport drive board (PFTDB) K toner suction fan motor (FM8) [12] Slide Interface board (REYB/SL) Color toner suction fan motor (FM7) [13] JMP board (JMPB)
  • Page 792 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing [26] [25] [23] [24] [22] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [18] [17] [16] [19] [21] [20] A00JF5C504DA Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13) [14] Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43) Pressure welding alienation sensor/color [15] Main erase lamp/K (EL/K) (PS52) Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
  • Page 793 [18] Toner supply motor/Y (M9) Horizontal Transport clutch 2 (CL4) [19] Toner supply motor/M (M10) Horizontal transport set sensor (PS58) [20] Toner supply motor/C (M11) [10] Tray4 paper feed clutch (CL7) [21] Toner supply motor/K (M12) [11] Transport motor (M25) *: bizhub C650 only...
  • Page 794 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing [25] [24] [23] [22] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [21] [20] [17] [19] [18] A00JF5C509DA Fusing motor (M30) [14] Tray2 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/2) Transfer belt motor (M1) [15] Tray3 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/3) IH coil (FH1) [16] Tray4 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/4)
  • Page 795 [11] Relay drive board (REDB) [25] Right door switch (MS1) [12] Dehumidifier heater transformer (T1) [26] 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) [13] Noise filter (NF1) 200 V areas only [27] Gate switch solenoid (SD1) [14] Fuse (F2)* *: bizhub C650 only...
  • Page 796 [13] Loop amount detection sensor/1 (PS41) SIF board (SIFB) * [14] Paper exit sensor (PS39) EIF board (EIFB) * [15] Heating roller rotation sensor/2 (PS57) Tray2 door set sensor (PS17) [16] Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS56) *: bizhub C650 only...

  • Page 797: Bypass Tray Section

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19.1.3 Bypass tray section [11] [10] A00JF5C511DA Bypass tray up down motor (M28) Bypass paper width detection resistor (VR1) Bypass paper feed motor (M27) Bypass set sensor (PS30) Bypass sub tray set sensor (PS37) Bypass paper empty sensor (PS34) Multi FD size sensor/3 (PS33) [10] Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35)
  • Page 798 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.1.4 Tray1 A00JF5C512DA Tray1 near empty sensor (PS3) Tray1 paper empty sensor (PS2) Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS6) Tray1 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS8) Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) Tray1 device detection sensor (PS1) Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5) Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS7)
  • Page 799 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19.1.5 Tray2 A00JF5C513DA Tray2 near empty sensor (PS11) Tray2 paper empty sensor (PS10) Tray2 upper limit sensor (PS14) Tray2 CD Paper size sensor/2 (PS16) Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Tray2 device detection sensor (PS9) Tray2 paper feed sensor (PS13) Tray2 CD Paper size sensor/1 (PS15)
  • Page 800 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.1.6 Tray3 A00JF5C514DA Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS20) Tray3 near empty sensor (PS22) Tray3 paper empty sensor (PS19) Tray3 paper feed clutch (CL5) Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) Tray3 transport clutch (CL6) Tray3 lift-up motor (M23)
  • Page 801 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19.1.7 Tray4 A00JF5C515DA Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS25) Tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26) Tray4 paper empty sensor (PS24) Tray4 near empty sensor (PS27)
  • Page 802 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.2 DF-611 [13] [14] [12] [11] [10] A01HF5C500DB Document width detection variable resistor (VR1) Regist clutch (CL1) Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5) Reading motor (M1) Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) [10] Take-up motor (M2) Brake clutch (CL3) [11] Take-up clutch (CL2)
  • Page 803 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [13] [14] [12] [10] [11] A01HF5C501DB Length sensor/1 (PS10) [12] Consolidation/2 (PS18) Length sensor/3 (PS12) [13] Consolidation/1 (PS19) Length sensor/4 (PS13) [14] Reverse regist sensor (PS8) Length sensor/2 (PS11) [15] Before read sensor (PS9) Lift up upper sensor (PS16)
  • Page 804 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.3 DF-610 [11] [10] [12] A07HF5C001DB [1] Document width detection variable resistor (VR1) [8] Take-up motor (M2) [2] Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5) [9] Regist motor (M7) [3] Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) [10] Exit motor (M3) [4] Stamp solenoid (SD3) * [11] Switch back solenoid (SD1)
  • Page 805 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [13] [14] [12] [10] [11] A07HF5C002DB Length sensor/1 (PS10) [12] Consolidation/2 (PS18) Length sensor/3 (PS12) [13] Consolidation/1 (PS19) Length sensor/4 (PS13) [14] Reverse regist sensor (PS8) Length sensor/2 (PS11) [15] Before read sensor (PS9) Lift up upper sensor (PS16)

  • Page 806: Lu-301 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.4 LU-301 (option) [13] [12] [11] [10] A03NF5C500DA LU door switch (MS1) Tray set sensor (PS1) Near empty sensor /2 (PS6) Lift-up motor (M1) Paper empty sensor (PS4) [10] Paper feed motor (M2) Tray LED (LED) [11] Transport motor (M3) Dehumidification heater (DH)

  • Page 807: Ot-503 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19.5 OT-503 (option) A092F5C500DA Exit paper cooling fun motor/2 (FM102) Exit paper cooling fun motor/1 (FM101) Exit paper cooling fun motor/3 (FM103)

  • Page 808: Zu-603 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.6 ZU-603 (option) [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A07TF5C500DA Main motor cooling fan (FM1) Noise filter (NF1) Punch shift motor (M5) [10] Coil (COIL) Punch shift home sensor (PS5) [11] DC power supply (DCPU) ZU control board (ZUCB) [12] Punch switchover switch (MS1)
  • Page 809 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 [10] [11] A07TF5C501DA Main motor (M6) 2nd stopper motor (M3) Conveyance encoder sensor (PS10) Gate solenoid/Up (SD2) Gate solenoid/Lw (SD1) Conveyance sensor (PS1) Registration motor (M1) [10] 1st stopper motor (M2) 2nd stopper home sensor (PS4) [11] 1st stopper home sensor (PS3) Exit sensor (PS9)
  • Page 810 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.7 FS-517/518/608 (option) [29] [30] (FS-518) [28] [27] [26] [25] [22] (FS-517/518) [24] [23] [21 ] (FS-517/518) [22] (FS-608) [21] (FS-608) [6] (FS-608) [20] [10] [19] [11] [18] FRONT [12] [17] [13] [16]...
  • Page 811 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 [13] [12] [14] [11] [10] A07RF5C500DA Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) FNS drive board (FSDB) Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS2) FNS control board (FSCB) Counter reset sensor (PS15) [10] Gate motor (M12) Bypass gate solenoid (SD5) [11] FNS transfer motor (M1)
  • Page 812 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing [1] (FS-517/518) [1] (FS-608) [4] (FS-517/518) A07RF5C501DB Stapler movement home sensor (PS11) Stapler rotation home sensor (PS13)* Folding paper exit sensor (PS25)* Tri-folding gate solenoid (SD6)* Folding full LED (PS30)* Stapler rotation motor (M6)* Stapler movement motor (M11) Alignment motor /Up (M5)
  • Page 813 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 A07RF5C504DA Fan motor /Rr (FM2) Transfer motor (M201) Fan motor /Fr (FM1) Transfer control board (TRCB) Paper pass sensor (PS202) Door open/close sensor (PS201)

  • Page 814: Pi-503 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.8 PI-503 (option) [1] [2] [24] [23] [22] [21] [20] [19] [10] [18] [13] [15] [17] [16] [14] [11] [12] A07VF5C500DA PI drive board (PIDB) [13] Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209) Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202) [14] Paper size VR /Lw (VR202) Registration clutch (CL203)
  • Page 815 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19.9 PK-512/513 (option) FRONT A04EF5C500DA Punch motor (M301) Punch shift home sensor (PS303) Paper size detect board (PSDTB) Punch shift motor (M302) Scraps box full sensor (PS302) Punch drive board (PDB) Punch home sensor (PS301) Scraps box set sensor (PS304)

  • Page 816: Fs-519 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.10 FS-519 (option) [13] [14] [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C514DA Entrance switch back sensor (PS4) Elevator top face detection sensor (PS12) Transport sensor (PS2) Exit paddle home position sensor (PS6) Entrance sensor (PS1) [10] Alignment home position sensor /1 (PS7) Storage tray detect sensor (PS3) [11] Stapler save position sensor (PS10)
  • Page 817 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C515DA Skew registration clutch (CL1) FS control board (FSCB) Duplex guide solenoid (SD3) Relay board/1 (REYB/1) Shutter detect switch (SW2) Slide switch (SW4) Relay board/2 (REYB/2) [10] Exit paddle solenoid (SD2) Storage paddle solenoid (SD1) [11] Elevator tray switch (SW3) Front door switch (SW1)
  • Page 818 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing [11] [10] A00KF5C501DA Cooling fan motor (M9) Elevator motor (M11) Entrance motor (M1) Align motor/1 (M5) Exit roller motor (M10) Transport motor/2 (M3) Align motor/2 (M6) [10] Shutter motor (M8) Exit motor (M4) [11] Transport motor/1 (M2) Stapling unit moving motor (M7)

  • Page 819: Pk-510 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19.11 PK-510 (option) 9J06F5C505DA Punch Trash full sensor (PS30)

  • Page 820: Mt-502 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.12 MT-502 (option) [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C506DA Cover open/close sensor (PS11) Paper detection sensor 1 (PS1) Paper full detection sensor 4 (PS8) [10] Paper detection sensor 2 (PS2) Paper detection sensor 4 (PS4) [11] Paper detection sensor 3 (PS3) Paper full detection sensor 3 (PS7)

  • Page 821: Sd-503 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19.13 SD-503 (option) [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C507DA Crease motor (M10) Saddle tray empty sensor (PS21) Crease roller home position sensor (PS22) In & out guide motor (M13) Layable guide home sensor (PS24) [10] Transport pulse sensor (PS25) Saddle interlock switch (SW4) [11] Saddle exit motor (M8)

  • Page 822: Js-504 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.14 JS-504 (option) [13] [12] [11] [10] A0D5F5C500DA Upper tray exit sensor (PS2) Upper tray paper full detect board/LED (T2FDTB/LED) Lower tray exit sensor (PS1) Route change motor (M3) Route change home sensor (PS4) [10] Lower tray paper full detect board/PR (T1FDTB/PR) Shift motor (M2)

  • Page 823: Connector Layout Drawing

    20. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 20. Connector layout drawing Description ➀ Number of pin Possible to confirm by removing external cover. Not possible to confirm by removing external cover. [31] [30] [29] [28] [27] [26] [25] [24] [23]...
  • Page 824 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 20. Connector layout drawing CN No. Location CN No. Location CN70 [24] CN63 CN68 J-2 to 3 [25] CN108 [10] CN73 [26] CN61 [11] CN40 E-21 to 22 [27] CN53 F-26 [12] CN41 D-21 to 22 [28] CN26 E to F-15 to 16...
  • Page 825 20. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 [1] [2] [31] [30] [29] [28] [27] [26] [25] [24] [10] [23] [11] [22] [12] [21] [13] [20] [14] [19] [15] [18] [16] [17] A00JF5C524DA CN No. Location CN No. Location CN78 [17]...
  • Page 826 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 20. Connector layout drawing CN No. Location CN No. Location [14] CN47 D-23 [30] CN77 [15] CN48 D-23 [31] CN76 J-5 to 6 [16] CN49 D-23...
  • Page 827 20. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 [1] [2] [3] [29] [28] [27] [26] [10] [11] [25] [12] [13] [24] [14] [23] [15] [22] [16] [21] [20] [17] [18] [19] A00JF5C525DA CN No. Location CN No. Location CN64 [16] CN27...
  • Page 828 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 20. Connector layout drawing CN No. Location CN No. Location [14] [29] CN62 I-1 to 2 [15]...
  • Page 829 20. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A00JF5C526DA CN No. Location CN No. Location CN112 R-10 [10] CN122 CN114 R-11 [11] CN119 U-5 to 6 CN105 Q to R-7 [12] CN118 U-5 to 6...

  • Page 830: Timing Chart

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 21. Timing chart 21. Timing chart 21.1 Main body Color mode/A4 or 8 x 11/tray1 Print request received Polygon motor LD enable (Y/M/C) LD enable (K) Transfer belt motor (M1) Cleaner motor (M38) 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)
  • Page 831 21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 21.2 DF-611/610 21.2.1 1-sided mode...
  • Page 832 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 21. Timing chart 21.2.2 2-sided mode...
  • Page 833 21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008...
  • Page 834 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.06 Ver. 8.0...
  • Page 835 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 836 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 CONTENTS Standard controller Outline Controller specifications ..................1 Type ........................1 Supporting client specifications ................2 Maintenance Checking the controller firmware version ..............3 Firmware upgrade ....................3 Notes about firmware rewrite................3 3.1.1 Types of firmware ..................
  • Page 837 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Troubleshooting Checking the system configuration ............... 37 Status codes ......................37 Troubleshooting procedures.................. 37 Unable to print over the network................. 37 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP............. 39 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail..........40 E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E-Mail is completed.40...

  • Page 838: Controller Specifications

    Outline Controller specifications Type Type Built-in type controller Monochrome print 1-sided: 65 prints/min, 2-sided: 65 prints/min bizhub C650 Color print 1-sided: 50 prints/min, 2-sided: 50 prints/min Monochrome print 1-sided: 55 prints/min, 2-sided: 55 prints/min Print speed bizhub C550 Color print...

  • Page 839: Supporting Client Specifications

    1. Controller specifications Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Power require- Shared with Main body ments Operating envi- 10 to 30 °C (50 to 86 °F) ronmental 15 to 85 % requirements Latin 80 fonts Fonts Latin 137 fonts Options Not available Supporting client specifications IBM PC and its compatible, Macintosh...

  • Page 840: Checking The Controller Firmware Version

    Firmware upgrade Notes about firmware rewrite 3.1.1 Types of firmware • Two types of firmware are released for bizhub C650/C550/C451. They are a mainte- nance release version and an enhanced version. Maintenance release version : Addresses remaining problems Function enhanced version...
  • Page 841 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 NOTE • Firmware can be rewritten only through the menu operation on the control panel and cannot be rewritten with the CS Remote Care system. • When XPS Enable Format/XPS Disable Format is performed, HDD is logical format- ted.
  • Page 842 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade (3) XPS Enable Format (bizhub C550/C451 only) • After completing Conversion Up, take the following steps if XPS Enable Format needs to be performed. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.
  • Page 843 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 E. Downgrade from the function enhancement 2 to the early mass-production firm- ware NOTE • Before downgrading the firmware, the following steps are required to be taken. (1) Conversion Down (bizhub C550/C451 only) 1.
  • Page 844 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 9. Touch [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [HDD Format] → [Logical For- mat]. 10. Check to see that the Start key is lit in blue. Touch the Start key to initiate Logical For- mat.
  • Page 845 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Downgrade from the function enhancement 4 to the function enhancement 3 NOTE • Before downgrading the firmware, the following steps are required to be taken. (1) Down Ver. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.

  • Page 846: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Windows Command Prompt

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade Preparations for firmware rewriting by Windows Command Prompt 3.2.1 Service environment • OS: Windows 2000/XP • Drive which enables writing/reading of compact flash • Compact flash (service tool) 3.2.2 Writing into the compact flash 1.
  • Page 847 • For ## within the above mkcf command, type two characters that correspond to the machine model on which firmware upgrading is made. Take a look at the following list to find right characters for a correct command. Model and command list bizhub C650 bizhub C550 bizhub C451 A00JF2E568DA...
  • Page 848 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 8. Upon completion of writing, CHECKSUM is executed. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched, “VERIFY OK” appears. 4038F2E565DB 9. Remove the compact flash from PC. NOTE • When removing the compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method.

  • Page 849: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006

    • This software is designed as the tool to write firmware data of MFP/printer released by KMBT into the compact flash card. 3.3.1 Correspond model • Correspond models of the software is as follows. • bizhub C650/C550/C451/C450/C353/C352/C351/C350/C300/C253/C250/C203 Color machine • bizhub C450P/C353P/C352P/C250P • bizhub 350/250/200 B/W machine •...

  • Page 850: Installation Of Software

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 3.3.4 Installation of software • Follow the procedures shown below to install the software. NOTE • Install the software to the PC with the administration authentication. • When any anti-virus program is activated, quite the program before the installa- tion.
  • Page 851 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. After checking the contents of license agreement, select [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next >]. 9J06F2E701DA 4. Select the installed destination folder of Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006, and click [Next>].

  • Page 852: Update Of Software

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 5. Click [Install] to start installation. 6. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 9J06F2E703DA 7. Shortcut file will be created inside Windows Start menu ([Program] → [KONICA MINOLTA] → [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006]). 9J06F2E708DA 3.3.5 Update of software...

  • Page 853: Screen

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.3.6 Screen A. Main window • The main window will be displayed after activating the software. • Main window consists of 2 patterns: Basic mode, Advanced mode When the advanced mode is selected 9J06F2E704DA About •...
  • Page 854 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade B. Settings dialog • It will be displayed by clicking [Settings] at main window. • Other settings will be enabled by selecting the check box of [Enabled Advanced Fea- tures]. 9J06F2E705DA Enable Advanced •...

  • Page 855: Details Of Each Function

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.3.7 Details of each function A. Basic functions (1) Write Firmware to a card • To write FW data into the compact flash. The FW data of the models shown below can be written.
  • Page 856 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade B. Advanced functions (1) Create a Firmware Image from a card • Create the image file from the firmware data written into the compact flash. Create the image file by dumping directly the data in the card. This function allows us to save the various type of firmware data in the compact flash as the image file and hold as copy data.

  • Page 857: How To Write Firmware Data

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.3.8 How to write firmware data A. In the case of C650/C550/C451/C450/C450P/C353/C353P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/ C253/C250/C250P/C203 series 1. Put the firmware data in the optional directory. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) 9J06F2E710DA NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.”...
  • Page 858 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 3. Mount the compact flash on the PC, and check the drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure) 9J06F2E712DA 4. Start Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. NOTE •...
  • Page 859 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Click [Browse]. 9J06F2E707DA 7. Select the file type [C650/C550/C451 Indexed Firmware]. A00HF2E509DA 8. Move to the folder decompressed at step 2, confirm that only "###_cf.tar.gz" (### is for model name) is displayed, and select. NOTE •...
  • Page 860 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 10. Select the drive that the compact flash is inserted, which is confirmed at step 3. NOTE • The drives other than the compact flash that is recognized as “Removable Disk” can be selected for the writing destination.
  • Page 861 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 13. Click [Yes], and data writing starts. NOTE • Writing a card is a resource intensive operation for your computer - do not attempt to multitask (use the computer for anything else) during the writing procedure. 14.

  • Page 862: Firmware Rewriting By Compact Flash

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade Firmware rewriting by compact flash • The firmware is updated using the compact flash. 3.4.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the compact flash card with the machine power turned 1.
  • Page 863 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 7. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].) A00JF2C557DA F/W to be updated Appropriate board MFP CONTROLLER MFP board (MFPB) SCANNER Image processing board (IPB) PRINTER Printer control board (PRCB) FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) *1 FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) *2 ADF (DF-M)
  • Page 864 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade NOTE • When turning the main power switch ON for the first time after the firmware is updated, data may sometimes be internally updated. In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power switch OFF until either the serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.

  • Page 865: Action When Data Transfer Fails

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.2 Action when data transfer fails • If “NG” appears on the control panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps. 1.

  • Page 866: Updating The Firmware With The Internet Isw

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade Updating the firmware with the Internet ISW 3.5.1 Outline • [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the firmware with the control panel of the main body, so the main body will automatically receive the firmware from the program server over a network for updating.
  • Page 867 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Touch [ON], and touch [END]. NOTE • Settings such as server setting, etc. will be available by selecting “ON” on this set- ting. • When the following setting is set to “ON”, “ON” cannot be selected on this setting. [Administrator Setting] →...
  • Page 868 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade C. Forwarding access setting • To make the access setting for the program server which stores the firmware data. 1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. 2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting]. A00JF2E584DA 3.

  • Page 869: Firmware Rewriting

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3.5.4 Firmware rewriting NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission before- hand. • DO NOT turn OFF the main/sub power switch while downloading. A. Conducting rewriting on the control panel. 1.
  • Page 870 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade C. Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return to the main screen. (2) Failing to update the firmware due to the network trouble 1.

  • Page 871: Error Code List For The Internet Isw

    [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] →...
  • Page 872 Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade Error code Description Countermeasure Control panel • Check the User’s network environment. (LAN cable’s connection) • Check the status of the following set- Error concerning the network ting. 0x00111000 [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → •...
  • Page 873 • If the above process does not solve the • There is no space for F/W data to be 0x10000104 problem, inform the corresponding downloaded. error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. 0x10000106 • Check sum error File access error • The file downloaded has an error.

  • Page 874: Status Codes

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 4. Checking the system configuration Troubleshooting Checking the system configuration • When a malfunction occurs, let the printer print a configuration page to check for system configuration. 1. Press the Utility/Counter key. 2. Touch [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Print Reports]. 3.
  • Page 875 6. Troubleshooting procedures Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Check Possible Cause Action Remark The print destination Set the correct See “User’s Guide port setting is wrong. port. [Print Operations].” PC operates errati- Restart the PC. cally temporarily. Uninstall the printer Printer driver incor- driver through the See “User’s Guide...

  • Page 876: Unable To Transmit Data Through Scan To Ftp

    Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 6. Troubleshooting procedures Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP. Check Possible Cause Action Remark The FTP server is not in Check with the network service. administrator. Check with the network IP address of the FTP administrator and enter server is wrong.

  • Page 877: Unable To Transmit Data Through Scan To E-Mail

    6. Troubleshooting procedures Field Service Ver. 8.0 Jun. 2008 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail. Check Possible Cause Action Remark The SMTP server is not in Check with the network service. administrator. Check with the network IP address of the SMTP administrator and enter the server is wrong.
  • Page 878 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.06 Ver. 3.0...
  • Page 879 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 880 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 CONTENTS i-Option LK-101/102/103 Outline Product outline ......................1 Available function for i-Option ................1 Product specification..................... 2 1.2.1 Web browser function ................... 2 1.2.2 Photo registration function ................2 Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section ................. 3 Service Mode ......................
  • Page 881 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 882: Outline

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 1. Product outline Outline Product outline Available function for i-Option • The functions available for i-Option LK-101/102/103 are as follows. Application Function Overview LK-101 LK-102 LK-103 • From the control panel, access content on the Inter- net or Intranet, in order to display or print this con- ✓...

  • Page 883: Product Specification

    1. Product outline Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 Product specification 1.2.1 Web browser function • Main specifications of the web browser installed are as follows. Browser engine NetFront Supported protocols HTTP, HTTPS, TCP/IP Supported markup/script HTML, CSS, JavaSrcript languages Supported image formats JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Animation GIF, PDF, Flash Supported SSL/TLS versions...

  • Page 884: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 2. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 885: Service Mode

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 Service Mode • When using i-Option LK-101/102/103, license management is done with the following procedures. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [License Management] • [License Management] can set Activation/Deactivation of each i-Option functions, Repair/Initialize of functions for troubleshooting, or etc.

  • Page 886: Billing Setting Function Tree

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 5. Press the following keys in this order. → Stop 6. Billing Setting menu will appear. A00JF3E536DB Billing Setting function tree Service Mode Ref. Page Billing Setting Counter Setting Management Function Choice Coverage Rate Clear License Management *2 Activation *2...

  • Page 887: Settings In The License Management

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 Settings in the License management 3.3.1 Activation Functions • To activate i-Option functions. • To activate i-Option functions with CE. • The functions can be activated by selecting the desired function and enter the appropri- ate license code.

  • Page 888: List

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 3.3.6 List Functions • To display activated functions. • To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number. • To display activated functions. • To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number. Setting/ •...

  • Page 889: License Management Function Setting Procedure

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 License Management function setting procedure • Each setting procedure of License Management function is as follows. • You need to access License Management System (LMS) to implement each function set- ting. 3.4.1 Activation 1.
  • Page 890 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 7. Enter request code and serial number, and click [Next]. A0PDF3E524DA 8. Enter “token number” described in the “token certificate”, and select the product name. 9. Click [Next]. A0PDF3E525DA...
  • Page 891 3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 10. Confirm the registered information, and click [Generate License Code]. A0PDF3E526DA 11. LMS issues license code. A0PDF3E527DA...
  • Page 892 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 12. Select [Activation] → [License code] at the MFP. 13. Enter the license code issued by LMS using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [END]. A0PDF3E537DA 14. Select i-Option to be activated, and touch [Apply]. A0PDF3E538DA 15.

  • Page 893: Deactivation

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.2 Deactivation 1. Call the Billing Setting to the screen. See P.4 2. Display and confirm the serial number with the following procedure. [License Management] → [Request code] See P.6 3. Access to LMS web site (for service). 4.
  • Page 894 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 6. Enter serial number, and click [Retrieval]. A0PDF3E529DA 7. Select i-Option to be deactivated, and click [Registration]. A0PDF3E530DA...
  • Page 895 3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 8. Nullification code is issued. A0PDF3E531DA 9. Select [Deactivation] → [Deactivation code] at the MFP. 10. Enter the nullification code issued by LMS using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [END].
  • Page 896 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 11. Select i-Option to be deactivated, and touch [Apply]. A0PDF3E540DA 12. When the deactivation is done appropriately, serial number and deactivation complete code are issued. Serial Number 0123456789012 Deactivation 01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789-01234 Complete Code Turn the main switch OFF and ON.
  • Page 897 3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 14. Click [Nullification completion] at LMS web site (for service). A0PDF3E532DA 15. Enter serial number and nullification code, and click [Registration]. A0PDF3E533DA 16. Message for nullification completion appears.

  • Page 898: Repair

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 3.4.3 Repair 1. Call the Billing Setting to the screen. See P.4 2. Display and confirm serial number, repair request code and request code with the fol- lowing procedure. [License Management] → [Repair] → [Repair Request Code] See P.6 NOTE •...
  • Page 899 3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 6. Enter serial number, restoration demand code and request code, and click [Registra- tion]. A0PDF3E535DA 7. Request permission code is issued. If any function needs to be activated, appropriate license code is also issued. A0PDF3E536DA...
  • Page 900 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 8. Select [Repair] → [Repair Code] at the MFP. 9. Enter the request permission code issued by LMS using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [END]. Repair Request Code Repair Code Repair A0PDF3E543DA 10.

  • Page 901: Initialize

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.4 Initialize • When license management information cannot be repaired, initialize the information with the following procedure. 1. Contact the license management section of sales company to report the information necessary to issue the initialize code. 2.

  • Page 902: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 4. Troubleshooting of i-Option Troubleshooting Troubleshooting of i-Option Outline 4.1.1 Structure of license management • The functions available with i-Option can be activated by entering “License code” to the MFP. • License code is issued and controlled by License Management System (LMS). To prevent unauthorized use of the license code, each MFP is identified individually so that the license code cannot be activated unless it matches with the authorized MFP.

  • Page 903: Error Message

    4. Troubleshooting of i-Option Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 Error message 4.2.1 License management error • When abnormal value is detected in the license management information that is stored to the NVRAM board or service EEPROM board, or some values are detected cleared, warning is issued to let the user know the abnormality.
  • Page 904 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 4. Troubleshooting of i-Option C. List of processing performed when boards of another machine are remounted during board replacement procedure • Remounting boards of machine B on machine A Machine B Request code is not gen- Request code is gener- erated in machine B Remarks:...
  • Page 905 4. Troubleshooting of i-Option Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page...
  • Page 906 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.01 Ver. 5.0...
  • Page 907 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 908 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 CONTENTS DF-611/610 Outline Product specifications ..................... 1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 5 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........5 2.1.1 Pick-up roller/feed roller ................5 2.1.2 Separation roller.................... 7 2.1.3 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls .............. 9 2.1.4 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers ............
  • Page 909 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 6.2.1 Original Stop Position ................. 28 6.2.2 Registration Loop Adj................. 28 6.2.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment ..............28 6.2.4 Paper Passage ................... 29 6.2.5 Sensor Check ..................... 29 6.2.6 Original Tray Width..................32 6.2.7 Read Pos Adj ....................
  • Page 910 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 9.2.5 C8302: Cooling fan failure................65 9.2.6 CC156: ADF ROM malfunction ..............65 9.2.7 Incorrect ROM content ................65 Set error detection....................66...
  • Page 911 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...
  • Page 912 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specifications Outline Product specifications A. Type Name Reverse automatic document feeder Paper feed section Paper feed from top of stack Image reading section Sheet-through system Type Turnover section Switchback system Exit section Straight exit system Installation Screw cramp to the main body...

  • Page 913: Product Specifications

    1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 D. Paper feed prohibited originals • If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible. Type of original Possible trouble Paper feed failure, damaged sheet, defective drive Sheets stapled or clipped together mechanism due to jammed staples or clips Sheets glued together Paper feed failure, damaged sheet...
  • Page 914 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specifications F. Mixed original feed chart For metric Max. original 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 128 mm size Mixed original size 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 128 mm...
  • Page 915 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 G. Machine specifications DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) Power requirements DC 5 V (generated within the DF-611/DF-610) Max. power 60 W or less consumption 618 mm (W) x 575 mm (D) x 130 mm (H) Dimensions 24.25 inch (W) x 22.75 inch (D) x 5 inch (H) DF-611: 16.1 kg (35.5 lb)

  • Page 916: Maintenance

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2.1.1 Pick-up roller/feed roller A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle •...
  • Page 917 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 (1) In the DF-611 case 3. Remove two C-clips [1], the bearing [2] and two springs [3] and remove the pick-up/feed roller assy [4]. A01HF2C002DA (2) In the DF-610 case 3. Remove two screws [1], two springs [2], and two pieces of fixation metal [3].

  • Page 918: Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 9. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bush- ing [2]. 10. Remove the feed roller [3]. 9J07F2C002DA 2.1.2 Separation roller A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Separation roller: Every 50,000 prints B. Periodically replaced parts/cycle •...
  • Page 919 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 D. Replacing procedure 1. Open the transportation cover. 2. Lift up the document feed tray. 3. Remove the screw [1] and the mounting plate [2]. NOTE • Be sure to hold the document feed tray to prevent the tray from falling down while removing the mounting plate.

  • Page 920: Cleaning Of The Miscellaneous Rolls

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 6. Remove the separation roller [1] from the shaft. A01HF2C006DA 2.1.3 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Miscellaneous rolls: Every 50,000 prints B. Cleaning procedure 1. Lift up the document feed tray. 2.
  • Page 921 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 5. Open the reverse automatic docu- ment feeder. 6. While opening the before scanning mylar assy [1], wipe the roll [2] using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 9J07F2C520DA 7. While opening the processing guide, remove four screws [1] and remove the transport roll assy [2].

  • Page 922: Cleaning Of The Miscellaneous Rollers

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 2.1.4 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Miscellaneous rollers: Every 50,000 prints B. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the transportation cover. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1].
  • Page 923 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1]. 9J07F2C524DA 7. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and remove the scanning guide [2]. 9J07F2C535DA 8. While turning processing knob [1], wipe the roller [2] using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

  • Page 924: Cleaning Of The Scanning Guide

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 2.1.5 Cleaning of the scanning guide A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Scanning guide: Every 50,000 prints B. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the reverse automatic document feeder. 2. Open the before scanning mylar assy [1].

  • Page 925: Service Tool

    3. Service tool Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 4. Open the reverse automatic docu- ment feeder. 5. While opening the before scanning mylar assy [1], clean the cloth [2] using a brush or other similar tools. 9J07F2C539DA Service tool CE tool list Tool name Shape...

  • Page 926: Other

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

  • Page 927: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    4. Other Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 4.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Feed cover P.16 Front cover P.17 Exterior parts Rear cover P.18 Document feed tray front cover P.19 Unit Reverse automatic document feeder P.19 DF control board P.21...

  • Page 928: Front Cover

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 3. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and two screws [2]. 4. Open the feed cover [3]. A01HF2C022DA NOTE • In the reinstallation steps, when tightening two screws [1], press the feed cover [3] in the direction of the arrow so as not to leave a clearance between the top of the protrusion from the surface of the feed cover...

  • Page 929: Rear Cover

    4. Other Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 4.3.3 Rear cover 1. Open the reverse automatic docu- ment feeder. NOTE • If the reverse automatic document feeder is set to be lifted up at angles up to 60 degrees due to the set position of the stopper for the hinge, change the set position to the lower side so that the reverse...

  • Page 930: Document Feed Tray Front Cover

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 4.3.4 Document feed tray front cover 1. Lift up the document feed tray. 2. Remove three screws [1]. A01HF2C027DA 3. Disconnect two connectors [1] and remove the document feed tray front cover [2]. A01HF2C014DA 4.3.5 Reverse automatic document feeder...
  • Page 931 4. Other Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 2. Open the reverse automatic docu- ment feeder. NOTE • If the reverse automatic document feeder is set to be lifted up at angles up to 60 degrees due to the set position of the stopper for the hinge, change the set position to the lower side so that the reverse automatic document feeder can be...

  • Page 932: Df Control Board

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 4.3.6 DF control board 1. Remove the rear cover. See P.18 2. Disconnect all the fifteen connectors from the DF control board. A01HF2C025DA 3. Remove the screw [1]. 4. Remove four screws [2] and remove the DF control board [3].
  • Page 933 4. Other Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the document width detection vari- able resistor [2]. 9J07F2C531DA A. Reinstallation procedure 1. Open the side edge stop [1] of the original feed tray. 9J07F2C532DA 2.
  • Page 934 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 3. Use two screws [1] to install the doc- ument width detection variable resis- tor [2]. NOTE • Install the gear and rack gear by aligning the arrows. 4. Connect the connector. 5.

  • Page 935: Replacing The Stamp Unit

    4. Other Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 4.3.8 Replacing the stamp unit 1. Open the transportation cover. 2. Lift up the document feed tray. 3. Remove the screw [1] and the mounting plate [2]. NOTE • Be sure to hold the document feed tray to prevent the tray from falling down while removing the mounting plate.

  • Page 936: Replacing The Stamp

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 5. Remove the cord clamp [1] and dis- connect the connector [2]. 6. Remove the screw [3] and remove the stamp unit [4]. 9J07F2C505DA 4.3.9 Replacing the stamp 1. Lift up the document feed tray [1]. A01HF2C505DA 2.
  • Page 937 4. Other Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 938: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 5. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 939: Service Mode

    6. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Service Mode Service Mode setting procedure See P.434 of the main body service manual. ADF setting procedure 6.2.1 Original Stop Position Functions • To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF modes.

  • Page 940: Paper Passage

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 6. Service Mode C. Main Scanning Direction Functions • To automatically adjust the read position in the Main Scanning Direction. • When ADF has been replaced. Setting/ P.39 procedure 6.2.4 Paper Passage Functions • To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes. •...
  • Page 941 6. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 C. Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individ- ual main unit. A01HF3E524DA...
  • Page 942 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 6. Service Mode D. Sensor check list Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Feed Open&Close Feed open/close sensor Open Close Read Open&Close Read open/close sensor Open Close Paper Paper not Registration Registration sensor present present...

  • Page 943: Original Tray Width

    6. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 6.2.6 Original Tray Width Functions • To set the values of maximum (A3 position) and minimum (B6 position) widths on the document width detection variable resistor. • When an original misfeed occurs. •...

  • Page 944: Mechanical Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the height NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the reverse automatic document feeder has been reinstalled. 1. Check the clearance between the upper face of scanner and the pro- trusion [1] on the reverse automatic document feeder side (2 spots, front/...

  • Page 945: Adjusting Skew Feed

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Adjusting skew feed 1. Check how the edges of the chart are misaligned. The amount of the deviation of the chart will be X. Deviation in + (plus) Deviation in - (minus) 9J07F3C513DA 2.
  • Page 946 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 7. Loosen the mounting screw [1] on the right hinge viewed from the front. 8. When the difference of the deviation is + (plus), turn the screw [2] coun- terclockwise to adjust. NOTE •...

  • Page 947: Original Stop Position

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Original Stop Position • Adjustment of the document stop position is made automatically and manually (by enter- ing numbers). The following adjustment is made in the Service Mode. NOTE • Before performing this adjustment, the feed zoom adjustment needs to be com- plete.
  • Page 948 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 5. Place the chart [1] in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up). 6. Press the Start key. A01HF3C516DA 7. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
  • Page 949 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 B. Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side Stop Position 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.434 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [ADF]. 3. Touch [Auto Stop Position Adjustment]. 4.
  • Page 950 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 7. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET]. 8. Touch [END]. 9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen. 10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch NOTE If the result is Unable: •...
  • Page 951 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 5. Place the chart [1] in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up). 6. Press the Start key. A01HF3C516DA 7. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
  • Page 952 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 3. Check that the difference in the widths of a between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range. Specifications: 0 ± 2 mm NOTE • In the same way place the chart with the blank side facing up in the document feed tray in the duplex mode and make a copy.
  • Page 953 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 10. Touch [END]. 11. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen. 12. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON. 13. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of a falls within the specified range.
  • Page 954 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.434 of the main body service manual. 6. Touch [ADF]. 7. Touch [Original Stop Position]. A01HF3E525DA 8. Touch [Main Scanning Direction]. 9. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.) •...

  • Page 955: Original Tray Width

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Original Tray Width NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the document width detection variable resistor has been replaced. • When the EEPROM has been replaced. 1.
  • Page 956 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 5. Touch [Max. Width]. 6. Press the Start key. 7. OK is displayed when the adjustment has been completed. A01HF3E534DA 8. Narrow the width across the edge guides [1] by sliding them to the “B6” position.

  • Page 957: Read Pos Adj

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Read Pos Adj NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the first/second carriage, the scanner wire, the scanner assy, the original glass moving unit, and/or the glass step sheet have been replaced. A.
  • Page 958 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 8. Make sure that the result is OK. 9. Touch [END]. 10. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen. 11. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch NOTE If the result is Unable: •...
  • Page 959 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Touch [Read Pos Adj]. A01HF3E538DA 8. Enter the value using the [-]/[+] keys. • If the difference in the widths of a is greater than the specifications, enter the - value. •...

  • Page 960: Feed Zoom

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment Feed Zoom • Adjustment of the feed zoom is made automatically and manually (by entering numbers). The following adjustment is made in the Service Mode. A. Auto adjust 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.434 of the main body service manual.
  • Page 961 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET]. 8. Touch [END]. A01HF3E540DA 9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen. 10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON. B.
  • Page 962 Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.434 of the main body service manual. 6. Touch [ADF]. 7. Touch [Feed Zoom]. 8. Touch [Orig. Feed Zoom Ad]. A01HF3E533DA 9. Enter the value using the [-]/[+] keys. •...
  • Page 963 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 964: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display Troubleshooting Jam display Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage pro- cedures.

  • Page 965: Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 8.2.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding cover, clear the sheet of paper misfed, and close the cover. Sensor layout 9J07F4C500DA [1] Exit sensor [4] Regist sensor [2] Reverse regist sensor [5] After separate sensor [3] Before read sensor...

  • Page 966: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display Solution 8.4.1 Turnover section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the reverse regist motion is performed. Detection of misfeed at turnover section The reverse regist sensor (PS8) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given...

  • Page 967: Paper Feed Section Misfeed

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 8.4.2 Paper feed section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of misfeed at The after separate sensor (PS4) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given paper feed section time after the take-up motor (M2) is turned ON.

  • Page 968: Transport Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display 8.4.3 Transport section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The regist sensor (PS3) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the after separate sensor (PS4) is turned ON. Detection of misfeed at transport section The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given...

  • Page 969: Paper Exit Section Misfeed

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 8.4.4 Paper exit section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the before read sensor (PS9) is turned ON. Detection of misfeed at •...

  • Page 970: Image Reading Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display 8.4.5 Image reading section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the regist sensor (PS3) is turned OFF. Detection of paper left in image reading section The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given...

  • Page 971: Original Feeding Interval Misfeed

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 8.4.6 Original feeding interval misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Original feeding interval The before read sensor (PS9) is turned ON earlier than a given time after misfeed the before read sensor (PS9) is turned OFF during original transportation. Relevant electrical parts Take-up motor (M2) DF control board (DFCB)

  • Page 972: Remaining Paper Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display 8.4.7 Remaining paper misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Due to a remaining sheet of paper that has not been detected by sensors, Remaining paper misfeed before the start of a job, a sensor detects the sheet at an unexpected tim- ing.

  • Page 973: Trouble Code

    9. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 Trouble code Trouble code list • The main unit’s cpu performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the touch panel. Code Description Detection timing Rank •...

  • Page 974: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 9. Trouble code Solution 9.2.1 C8101: Pressure/retraction mechanism failure before image reading Relevant electrical parts Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) DF control board (DFCB) Read roller sensor (PS6) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the motor and sensor connectors...

  • Page 975: C8103: Lift Up Mechanism Failure

    9. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 9.2.3 C8103: Lift up mechanism failure Relevant electrical parts Lift-up motor (M6) DF control board (DFCB) Lift up lower sensor (PS16) Lift up upper sensor (PS15) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components)

  • Page 976: C8302: Cooling Fan Failure

    Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 9. Trouble code 9.2.5 C8302: Cooling fan failure Relevant electrical parts Cooling fan (FM1) DF control board (DFCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the connector of FM1 for proper —...

  • Page 977: Set Error Detection

    10. Set error detection Field Service Ver. 5.0 Jan. 2008 10. Set error detection • When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected, the panel of the main unit will have the following display. A01HF4C500DA <Panel display and detection timing for each> Panel Description of Detection start...
  • Page 978 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.05 Ver. 3.0...
  • Page 979 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 980 Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 CONTENTS LU-301 Outline Product specification ....................1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........3 2.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller................3 2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller ................4 2.1.3 Replacing the separation roller ..............5 Other ........................
  • Page 981 Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 Check procedure ....................32 Sensor check list ....................32 5.2.1 Sensor check screen .................. 32 5.2.2 Sensor check list..................33 Mechanical adjustment ..................34 Adjusting the paper reference position ............... 34 6.1.1 Centering ....................34 6.1.2 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) ..............

  • Page 982: Product Specification

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 1. Product specification Outline Product specification A. Type Name 3,000 sheets Large Capacity Unit Type External option attached to the right side of the main body Document alignment Center B. Paper type Type Size Weight Capacity Plain paper...
  • Page 983 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 Blank Page...

  • Page 984: Periodical Check

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) 2.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Replacing procedure 1. Open the upper door. 2.

  • Page 985: Replacing The Feed Roller

    2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Feed roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Replacing procedure 1. Open the upper door. 2. Move the feed roller [1] up. A03NF2C001DA 3.

  • Page 986: Replacing The Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 2. Periodical check 2.1.3 Replacing the separation roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Separation roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Replacing procedure 1. Open the upper door. 2. Move the feed roller [1] up. A03NF2C001DA 3.

  • Page 987: Other

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

  • Page 988: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3. Other Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 3.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Part name Ref. page Section Unit Large capacity unit P.10 Upper door P.10 Right cover Exterior parts P.11 Front cover P.12 Rear cover Feed cover P.13 Up/down section Lift wire...

  • Page 989: Disassembly/Assembly Procedure

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 Disassembly/Assembly procedure 3.3.1 Large capacity unit 1. Remove the LCT from the main body to remove three screws [1]. Remove the lower right cover/4 [2] from the main body. A03NF2C502DA 2. Remove two screws [1] to remove the lower right cover/2 [2] from the main body.
  • Page 990 Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3. Other 4. Disconnect each of the two connec- tors [1] and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2]. A03NF2C511DA 5. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting plate [2]. A03NF2C504DA...

  • Page 991: Upper Door

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3.3.2 Upper door 1. Remove the right cover. See P.10 2. Remove the front cover. See P.11 3. Remove the rear cover. See P.12 4. Remove the feed cover. See P.13 5. Open the upper door. 6.

  • Page 992: Front Cover

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3. Other 3.3.4 Front cover 1. Remove the right cover. See P.10 2. Remove the harness from the con- nector [1] and the wire saddle [2]. A03NF2C007DA 3. Loosen five screws [1] and remove the front cover [2].

  • Page 993: Rear Cover

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3.3.5 Rear cover 1. Remove the right cover. See P.10 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the sheet metal [2]. A03NF2C009DA 3. Loosen five screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2]. A03NF2C010DA...

  • Page 994: Feed Cover

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3. Other 3.3.6 Feed cover 1. Remove the right cover. See P.10 2. Remove the front cover. See P.11 3. Remove the rear cover. See P.12 4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the feed cover [2]. A03NF2C011DA 3.3.7 Lift wire...
  • Page 995 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 2. Remove nine screws [1] and five screws [2] to remove the motor assy [3] and the drive board assy [4]. A03NF2C015DA 3. Remove the lift wire/L [2] from the rotation plate [1]. A03NF2C016DA 4.
  • Page 996 Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3. Other 5. Remove the E-ring [1] on the front side to remove the wire holding jig [2]. A03NF2C018DA 6. Remove the E-ring [1] on the rear side to remove the driving pulley [2]. A03NF2C019DA 7.
  • Page 997 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 8. Remove two E-rings [1] and two wire [2] [3] pulleys [2] to remove the lift wire/S [3] and the lift wire/L [4]. A03NF2C021DA 9. Remove the E-ring [1] on the front side to remove the driving pulley [2].
  • Page 998 Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3. Other 11. Remove two E-rings [1] and two wire pulleys [2] to remove the lift wire/S [3] and the lift wire/L [4]. A03NF2C023DA B. Installation of the lift wire 1. Insert the lift wire/L [2] to the left hole [1] on the rear face.
  • Page 999 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3. Insert the lift wire/S [2] to the right hole [1] on the rear face. A03NF2C025DA 4. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley, and set the lift wire/S [4] to the far side groove [3] and secure them with the E-ring [5].
  • Page 1000 Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 3. Other 5. Take the edges of the lift wire/S [1] and the lift wire/L [2] and set them to the holes on the shaft [3]. A03NF2C026DA 6. Take the edge of the lift wire/L [1] and set it to the hole on the shaft [2].
  • Page 1001 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 May 2007 8. Insert the lift wire/L [2] to the right hole [1] on the front face. A03NF2C028A 9. Set the lift wire/L [2] to the near side groove [1] on the wire pulley and secure it with the E-ring [3].

This manual is also suitable for:

Bizhub c550Bizhub c451

Table of Contents

Save PDF